JP7801751B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, various winning holes (starting hole, big winning hole, regular winning hole) are provided in the gaming area through which gaming balls can flow. When a gaming ball enters one of the winning holes, a prize ball is awarded to the player.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170

However, with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances. Its objective is to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
a game control means capable of determining whether a ball has been hit based on the ball entering the ball entrance;
A specific operating means that can be operated;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
Based on the determination in the hit determination, the game can be controlled to a jackpot game state,
When the specific operation means is operated upon power-on, information relating to a game can be erased;
When the difference between the number of prize balls awarded to a player and the number of shot balls is defined as the difference in the number of balls, it is possible to measure a specific measurement number which is the difference between the minimum difference in the number of balls, which is the minimum value of the difference in the number of balls, and the maximum value of the difference in the number of balls after the minimum difference in the number of balls is measured,
When the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number while the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, the hit determination is disabled at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends;
If the information relating to the game is not erased when the power is turned on after the hit determination is disabled, the hit determination is maintained as being disabled,
After the hit determination is disabled, when the information relating to the game is to be erased upon power-on, the disablement of the hit determination is released,
the game control means is provided with a specific output process for outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than a specific number smaller than the reference number,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized by being capable of executing a specific measurement number presentation that shows a number related to the specific measurement number.

This invention makes it possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to players.

FIG. FIG. A front view showing the second large prize device and other details. FIG. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device are in standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device are activated. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a 7-segment display. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to the general map, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to the special map. (A) is a winning determination table, (B) is a normal game fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. This is a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a look-ahead determination table. This is a jackpot game control table. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal fluctuations in special chart fluctuation effects. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach in the special chart change performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an SP reach in the special chart change performance. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold effect. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable object effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an operation presentation. A diagram showing the over-prize ball prevention function. A diagram showing the resetting of the difference in the number of balls. (A) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when there is an excess prize ball abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when there is a magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an image predicting an excess prize ball, and (B) is a diagram showing an image predicting a game stop. (A) is a figure in which a purple-bordered image is displayed when the state is high probability and high base, and (B) is a figure in which a red-bordered image is displayed when the state is high probability and high base. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when the waiting state for customers has continued for one hour. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of an input process. 10 is a flowchart of the difference ball number measurement process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of a customer waiting measurement process. 10 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 10 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart of an output process. 10 is a flowchart of an outer end signal output process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a 1m timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a 10m timer interrupt process. This figure shows a case where an operation warning display is executed after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where an operation warning effect is executed after an unauthorized magnetism is detected. A diagram showing the excess prize ball prevention function in the first modified example. A diagram showing the remaining reserve special effect in the first variant example. A figure showing round alternative effects and time-saving mode alternative effects in the second modified example. A diagram showing a special effect for replacing remaining reserves in the second variant. A diagram showing the function of preventing excessive prize balls in the third modified example. A figure showing the special effects after normal transition in the third variant. A figure showing an alternative presentation after transition to normal in the fourth variant example. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process in the fifth modified example. A figure showing a case in which a contact warning display is executed after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated in the fifth modified example. A figure showing a case in which a contact warning display is executed after an unauthorized magnetism is detected in the fifth modified example. This is a diagram showing the case where the game is stopped after the special mode substitution effect in the sixth variant. A figure showing a case in which the game is stopped after a round replacement presentation in the seventh modified example. A diagram showing the function of preventing excessive prize balls in the eighth modified example. A figure showing the reference number reaching preview effect and mini screen effect in the eighth variant example. A figure showing the reference number reaching preview effect and mini screen effect in the eighth variant example. A figure showing the celebration effects and mini screen effects in the eighth variant example. 13 is a jackpot symbol type determination table in the ninth modified example. In the ninth modified example, this is a big win game control table. A diagram showing the function of preventing excessive prize balls in the ninth variant example. This figure shows the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect and mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect in the ninth variant example. A diagram showing the function of preventing excessive prize balls in the 10th variant. A figure showing the excessive ball abnormality warning display and the remaining ball number notification display in the 10th variant example. This figure shows the settings for the excessive ball abnormality warning display and the residual ball number notification display during initial setup after power-on in the 11th variant example. A figure showing the excessive ball abnormality warning display and the remaining ball number notification display in the 11th variant example. 23 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process in the twelfth modified example. A figure showing the display state of the balance display section in a situation where the game cannot be played in the twelfth modified example. In the 12th variant, (A) is a diagram showing the notification that balls cannot be loaned when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, and (B) is a diagram showing the notification that balls cannot be loaned when fraudulent magnetism is detected. This figure shows the settings for the excessive ball abnormality warning display and the remaining ball number notification display when in the customer waiting state in the 13th variant. A diagram showing the function of preventing excessive prize balls in the 14th variant example. A figure showing the current difference in ball number suggestion display in the 14th variant example. A figure showing the current difference in ball number suggestion display and the current difference in ball number adjustment display in the 14th variant example. A figure showing the current difference in ball number suggestion display and the current difference in ball number adjustment display in the 14th variant example. A figure showing the current difference in ball number suggestion display and the current difference in ball number adjustment display in the 14th variant example. A figure showing a case in which the game is stopped after a game stop notice display in the 14th variant example. A figure showing a case where an input reflected image is displayed after a character input effect in the fifteenth modified example. A figure showing a case where an input reflection image is displayed while a customer waiting effect is being executed in the 15th variant example. A diagram showing a special SP reach in the 16th variant example. A figure showing when a normal cut-in preview performance is executed and when a special cut-in preview performance is executed in the 16th variant example. A figure showing when a normal opening effect is executed and when a special opening effect is executed in the 16th variant example. A figure showing the cases when a normal customer waiting demo performance is executed and the case when a special customer waiting demo performance is executed in the 16th variant example. This figure shows a case in which control that makes it impossible to play a game continues after the power is turned on after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated in the 17th variant. This figure shows a case in which control that makes it impossible to play a game continues after the power is turned on after an illegal magnetism is detected in the 17th variant example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of the ball jamming prevention mode in the eighteenth modified example. 23 is a flowchart of a power-on process in the eighteenth modified example. 23 is a flowchart of a RAM clear process in the eighteenth modified example. 20 is a flowchart of ball jamming prevention mode processing in the eighteenth modified example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of the ball trapping prevention mode in the 19th modified example. 23 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing in the nineteenth modification example. 20 is a flowchart of ball jamming prevention mode processing in the nineteenth modified example. A diagram showing the resetting of the difference in the number of balls in a modified example. This is a diagram showing a modified example in which the difference in the number of balls is displayed on a 7-segment display. A figure showing a case where a residual ball number suggestion effect and a residual ball number adjustment effect are executed in a modified example. A figure showing a press prompt effect and a reach achievement effect in a modified example. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an enclosed type pachinko gaming machine in which a six-digit seven-segment display is arranged in a modified example. A diagram to explain the maximum difference in number of balls in a modified example. A diagram showing the increase in the number of balls from the minimum difference in number of balls in a modified example.

Embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings referred to, identical parts will be given the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations of identical parts will generally be omitted. For the sake of simplicity, this specification may use symbols or signs that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, components, etc., and omit or abbreviate the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, components, etc. associated with those symbols or signs. Furthermore, in any of the flowcharts described below, the execution order of multiple processes in any of the steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel, as long as no inconsistencies occur in the process content.

1. Structure of the Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described using Figures 1 to 5. In the following description, the left, right, up, and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the left, right, up, and down directions (as viewed from the front) of a player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "forward" refers to the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "rearward" refers to the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. The gaming machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 22. The front door 23 further includes a gaming board mounting frame 2A to which a gaming board unit YU (described later) is attached, and a front frame 23m that is rotatably supported on the gaming board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed relative to the gaming board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the gaming board 1 attached to the gaming board mounting frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in an amusement parlor (game parlor), a player standing in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can see the playing area 6 formed on the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t can be made of a transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like. It is sufficient that the playing area 6 can be seen from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to launch game balls is provided at the lower right of the front of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is rotated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (launch strength) of the force applied to the game ball to launch it (the amount by which the launch device 72, described below, drives the launch solenoid). Therefore, game balls are launched with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation of the handle 72k. In addition, a lower decorative body 36 that protrudes significantly forward is provided at the lower center of the front of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 is formed on the top surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. In addition, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as the "normal button") 40 is provided on the top surface of the lower decorative body 36, forward of the upper tray 34. The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button with a depression surface, a lever with a grip, etc. In addition, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as the "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32, which is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 is composed of, for example, a button with a depression surface, a lever with a grip, etc. Although not shown in Figure 1, a select button (cross key) for selecting up, down, left, or right is provided to the left of the normal button 40.

On the top surface of the lower decorative body 36, to the right of the normal button 40, there are provided a balance display unit 61, a pressable ball lending button 62, and a pressable return button 63. The balance display unit 61 displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into the card unit CU. The ball lending button 62 (operation means) is pressed to allow ball lending up to the number shown on the balance display unit 61. The return button 63 is pressed to remove a card from the card unit CU that contains the number shown on the balance display unit 61 (information on the number of game balls that can be lent).

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, which protrudes forward from the top of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 (sound output means) consists of a left speaker 52L located on the left side and a right speaker 52R located on the right side. Illuminating frame lamps 53 are also provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower tray 35 at the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, movable frame movable devices 58 are attached to the upper left and right edges of the front frame 23m as presentation devices intended to heighten interest in the game. The frame movable devices 58 consist of a left frame movable device 58L located on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R located on the right side.

The position and number of components and devices installed on the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly using Figures 2 to 5. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a presentation unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. An opening 1A that is roughly circular when viewed from the front is formed in approximately the center of the game board 1. A roughly ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B protrudes forward along the opening 1A to define a play area 6 into which game balls can flow. In addition, a roughly ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C protrudes forward from the outside of the inner wall portion 1B to define the play area 6.

A play area 6 surrounded by an inner wall 1B, an outer wall 1C, etc. is formed on the front of the game board 1. In other words, the front of the game board 1 is divided into the play area 6 and the rest of the area by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The play area 6 is an area into which game balls launched by operating the handle 72k can flow, and is provided for playing games on the pachinko game machine PY1. Numerous game nails (not shown) protrude from the play area 6. The game nails form paths that appropriately guide game balls that enter the play area 6 and flow down the play area 6 to the first start opening 11, second start opening 12, general prize opening 10, gate 13, first large prize opening 14, and second large prize opening 15, which will be described later.

The game area 6 is provided with a first start winning device 11D, which has a first start opening 11 through which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device (a so-called "electric chute") 12D, which allows or prevents the ball from entering the second start opening 12.

The first start entry device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the ease with which a gaming ball can enter the first start opening 11 remains constant (unchanging). The entry of a gaming ball into the first start opening 11 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 1") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Symbol 1, as described below; hereinafter referred to as "Drawing for Special Symbol 1") and the variable display of Special Symbol 1 (identification symbol). Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 11, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, four) are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chute 12D is equipped with an operable electric chute opening/closing member 12k. The electric chute opening/closing member 12k is normally (in its normal state) in a closed position, making it impossible or extremely difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second starting hole 12. When a special state is entered, it moves to an open position, allowing a gaming ball to enter the second starting hole 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chute opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D, and gaming balls can enter the second starting hole 12 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k in its closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D. In addition, when the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D is in the "open state," it is also referred to as "the electric chute 12D being open," and when the electric chute 12D is in the "closed state," it is also referred to as "the electric chute 12D being closed."

The entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 12 triggers a lottery for a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 2") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Symbol 2, as described below; hereinafter referred to as "Lottery for Special Symbol 2") and the variable display of Special Symbol 2 (identification symbol). Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, four) are paid out as prize balls.

The gaming area 6 also has a general winning opening 10 through which gaming balls can enter. When a gaming ball enters the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., three) are paid out as prize balls.

The game area 6 is also provided with a gate 13 through which the game ball can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 triggers the drawing of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "regular symbol") (i.e., the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number; hereinafter referred to as "regular symbol drawing") and the variable display of the regular symbol. The electric chute 12D is opened when the auxiliary game is played. In other words, the auxiliary game is a game that involves the opening of the electric chute 12D.

The gaming area 6 is also provided with a first large prize device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") that has a first large prize opening 14 through which gaming balls can enter.

The first large prize winning device 14D is equipped with a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated between an open state and a closed state. The first large prize winning opening 14 is opened and closed by operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that blocks the first large prize winning opening 14, making it impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the first large prize winning opening 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to the open state, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the first large prize winning opening 14. In this way, game balls can enter the first large prize winning opening 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the first large prize winning opening 14, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 15) are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guide stage 12g that guides game balls to the second starting opening 12. Game balls rolling on the upper surface of the guide stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting opening 12.

The game area 6 is also provided with a second large prize device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second large prize opening 15 through which game balls can enter. The second large prize device 15D is equipped with an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally blocks the second large prize opening 15, making it impossible or extremely difficult for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, game balls can easily enter the second large prize opening 15. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k blocks the second large prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state." In this way, the second large prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When a gaming ball enters the second large winning slot 15, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 15) are paid out as prize balls.

Now, using Figure 3, we will explain the second large prize device 15D in detail. Inside the second large prize device 15D, there is a gate-shaped second large prize opening sensor 15a that detects a gaming ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 and can allow the gaming ball to pass downward.

In the area downstream of the second large prize opening sensor 15a, there is a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter). Game balls that pass through the second large prize opening sensor 15a are sorted by a sorting device 16D into either the specific area 16 or the non-specific area 17. The sorting device 16D is equipped with a sorting member 16k consisting of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The sorting member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by the drive of the sorting solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in a first state (passage prevention state: when viewed from the front in Figure 3 (A), the left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above) in which it prevents game balls from passing through to the specific area 16. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, after a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15 passes through the second large prize opening sensor 15a, it is impossible or extremely difficult for it to pass through the specific area 16, and it passes through the non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing from the second large prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called the first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state that allows game balls to pass through (enter) the specific area 16 (passage-permitting state: when viewed from the front in Figure 3 (B), the left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above, and the area directly above the specific area 16 is open). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing the second large prize opening sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second large prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called the second route.

Basically, the distributing member 16k is maintained in the first state. In other words, the first state can be said to be the normal state of the distributing member 16k. Then, only during a predetermined round of play (e.g., 10 rounds), can the distributing solenoid 16s be energized and change to the second state.

Specific area sensor 16a and non-specific area sensor 17a are provided in specific area 16 and non-specific area 17, respectively, to detect game balls that pass through (enter) each area 16, 17 and allow the game balls to pass downward.

It is possible to provide only one of the first special prize device 14D and the second special prize device 15D, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Also, at approximately the bottom of the game area 6, two outlets 19 are provided for discharging game balls that have been shot into the game area 6 but have not entered any of the winning slots to the outside of the game area 6. The game board 1 is also provided with an illuminating board lamp 54.

The play area 6 through which game balls can flow can be divided into a left play area (first play area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right play area (second play area) on the right side. The operation of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the left play area is called a "left hit." On the other hand, the operation of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the right play area is called a "right hit." In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which game balls can flow when launched by a left hit is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which game balls can flow when launched by a right hit is called the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a number of game nails, etc.

A first starting opening 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, by using a left-handed shot to launch a game ball down the first flow path R1, a player can aim for a win in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10. On the other hand, a second starting opening 12, a gate 13, a first large winning opening 14, and a second large winning opening 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, by using a right-handed shot to launch a game ball down the second flow path R2, a player can aim for a win by passing through the gate 13 or in the second starting opening 12, the first large winning opening 14, or the second large winning opening 15.

In addition, game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots (first start slot 11, second start slot 12, general winning slot 10, first large winning slot 14, and second large winning slot 15) are guided to and discharged from the outlet 19. In addition, the number of winning balls awarded for each winning slot can be set appropriately.

In addition, displays 8 are located below and to the left of the play area 6 formed on the front of the game board 1 (in the area other than the play area 6). As shown in Figure 4, displays 8 include a special chart 1 display 81a that variably displays special chart 1, a special chart 2 display 81b that variably displays special chart 2, and a regular chart display 82 that variably displays regular charts. In addition, displays 8 include a special chart 1 reserved indicator 83a that displays the number of special chart 1 reserved (U1: the number of reserved variable displays of special chart 1 by the special chart 1 display 81a), and a special chart 2 reserved indicator 83b that displays the number of special chart 2 reserved (U2: the number of reserved variable displays of special chart 2 by the special chart 2 display 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of special chart 1 is executed when a lottery for special chart 1 is held in response to a game ball entering the first starting gate 11. Furthermore, the variable display of special chart 2 is executed when a lottery for special chart 2 is held in response to a game ball entering the second starting gate 12. In the following explanation, special charts 1 and 2 are collectively referred to as special charts, and the lottery for special chart 1 and the lottery for special chart 2 are collectively referred to as special chart lotteries. Furthermore, the special chart 1 display 81a and the special chart 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as special chart display 81. Furthermore, the special chart 1 reserve display 83a and the special chart 2 reserve display 83b are collectively referred to as special chart reserve display 83.

The variable display of the special symbol notifies the results of the special symbol lottery. In the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol is displayed variably and then statically. The statically displayed special symbol (static special symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the static special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, i.e., a jackpot symbol), a jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played in which the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 14 and second jackpot opening 15) are opened.

The special symbol display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged horizontally, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special symbol display 81 displays a jackpot symbol consisting of the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: unlit). Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the special symbol display 81 displays a loss symbol consisting of only the rightmost LED lit, such as "■■■■■■■□." The lighting state of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off to indicate a loss symbol.

In addition, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is displayed for a predetermined variable time before it is displayed in a static manner. The variable display of the special symbol is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display of the special symbol is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously, unless each LED is displayed in a static manner (illuminated in a specific manner).

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) may be obtained for use in conducting special drawing lotteries, etc. These various random numbers are temporarily stored as special drawing reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105, described below. Note that, hereinafter, the various random numbers obtained when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1-related random numbers," and the various random numbers obtained when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12 are referred to as "special drawing 2-related random numbers." Here, the special drawing 1-related random numbers are stored as special drawing 1 reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105a within the special drawing reserve memory unit 105. On the other hand, the special drawing 2-related random numbers are stored as special drawing 2 reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105b within the special drawing reserve memory unit 105. An upper limit (for example, 4) can be set for the number of special chart 1 reservations (special chart 1 reservation number) that can be stored in the special chart 1 reservation memory unit 105a and the number of special chart 2 reservations (special chart 2 reservation number) that can be stored in the special chart 2 reservation memory unit 105b. Note that, below, special chart 1 reservations and special chart 2 reservations are collectively referred to as "special chart reservations," and the number of special chart 1 reservations and the number of special chart 2 reservations are collectively referred to as "special chart reservation number." Additionally, special chart 1-related random numbers and special chart 2-related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special chart-related random numbers."

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, if the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically if a prize is won while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed or during a jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol (or the right to draw a special symbol) for that prize can be reserved. The reserved special symbol stored in the special symbol reserve memory unit 105 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on that reserved special symbol becomes possible. In other words, consuming the reserved special symbol means determining the special symbol-related random number, etc. corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of that determination.

The number of reserved special drawings is then displayed on the reserved special drawing display 83. The reserved special drawing 1 display 83a and the reserved special drawing 2 display 83b each consist of, for example, four LEDs, and the number of reserved special drawings can be displayed by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special drawings.

The variable display of the normal map also notifies the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed variably and then stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a result of the variable display) is one normal map selected from multiple types of normal maps by the normal map lottery. If the stopped normal map is a specific, predetermined normal map (a normal map with a predetermined stopping pattern, i.e., a winning pattern), an auxiliary game is played in which the second starting hole 12 (electric chute 12D) is opened.

The regular map display 82 is made up of, for example, two LEDs, and displays a regular map according to the result of the regular map lottery depending on how they light up. If the result of the regular map lottery is a win, the regular map display 82 displays a winning pattern consisting of both LEDs lit, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: unlit). If the result of the regular map lottery is a loss, the regular map display 82 displays a losing pattern consisting of only the right LED lit, such as "■□". A losing pattern may also be one in which all LEDs are unlit. The lighting pattern of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the regular map lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

In addition, before the normal map is displayed as stopped, the normal map is displayed as a variable display for a predetermined variable time. The variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs light up alternately. Note that the variable display of the normal map is not particularly limited, and may be set appropriately, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously, unless each LED is displayed as stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a normal symbol lottery may be obtained. This random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106, described below, on the condition that the normal symbol variable display or auxiliary game is not being executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, four) on the number of normal symbol reserves (normal symbol reserve number) that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106. Note that, below, the normal symbol random number obtained when a gaming ball passes through gate 13 is also referred to as a "normal symbol-related random number."

Next, using Figure 5, we will explain the presentation unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1. The presentation unit 1U is a unit made up of multiple devices that mainly perform presentations. The presentation unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as the "above-board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as the "below-board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is equipped with a display screen 50a that can display images, etc., and is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D LCD display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc.

The above-board movable device 55 is positioned in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated above-board movable body 55k. The below-board movable device 56 is positioned in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated below-board movable body 56k.

Figure 5(A) shows a schematic representation of the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k held in a normal standby state (initial position) when not in operation. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is driven, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (descends), and when the drive source of the below-board movable device 56 is driven, the below-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered above-board movable body 55k or the raised below-board movable body 56k, making the image display device 50 difficult to see.

The position and number of components and devices installed on the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described based on Figures 6 to 9. As shown in Figures 6 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is equipped with a game control board (hereinafter also referred to as the "main control board") 100 that controls game profits (game progress) such as special symbol lottery, variable display of special symbols, jackpot game, game state setting (described later), normal symbol lottery, variable display of normal symbols, and supplementary games, a presentation control board (hereinafter also referred to as the "sub-control board") 120 that controls presentations such as game presentations (special symbol variable presentations, hold presentations, jackpot game presentations) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, customer waiting presentations, and operation promotion presentations that prompt operation during the period when operation of the normal button 40 or special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), and a payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., located further back than the image display device 50 on the gaming board 1 (see Figure 8). The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls the effects, together with the image control board 140, lamp control circuit 151, and audio control circuit 161 described below. The effect control unit only needs to be equipped with at least the effect control board 120 and be able to control game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation prompt effects using effect means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, etc.).

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 also includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the presentation control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is equipped with a depressible RAM clear switch 191. The RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means) causes the gaming CPU 102 to clear (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") game information (e.g., game state information such as high probability states, the number of reserved special symbols, and the results of jackpot determinations) stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described below) when the machine is powered on. As shown in Figure 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is located on the power supply board 190, which is located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated by anyone other than an amusement parlor employee who can open or close the front door 23. In other words, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate; for example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board.

The power supply board 190 is also provided with a backup power supply circuit 192. When power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the presentation RAM 124 of the presentation control board 120, which will be described later. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the presentation RAM 124 of the presentation control board 120 is retained even when power is lost to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. A power switch 193 is also connected to the power supply board 190. Power is turned on and off by turning the power switch 193 on or off. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100, and a backup power supply circuit for the presentation RAM 124 of the presentation control board 120 may be provided on the presentation control board 120.

As shown in Figure 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "game control microcomputer") 101, which controls the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as work memory, and a game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes the programs stored in the game ROM 103.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing the main control processing and main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 also stores a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special symbol variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a win determination table, a regular symbol variation pattern determination table, and an auxiliary game control table, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 may also be external.

The gaming RAM 104 is provided with the special game reserve memory unit 105 and the regular game reserve memory unit 106, as previously mentioned. The gaming RAM 104 is also provided with a non-erasable memory unit 107, which is provided with a total number of prize balls memory unit 107a, a total number of shot balls memory unit 107b, and a difference in number of balls memory unit 107c. The non-erasable memory unit 107 is designed so that the gaming CPU 102 does not erase its stored contents even when RAM clear is executed. The non-erasable memory unit 107 (total number of prize balls memory unit 107a, total number of shot balls memory unit 107b, and difference in number of balls memory unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see Figure 8). As shown in Figure 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment display with a total of 32 illuminated (light-emitting) areas. Specifically, from left to right, the 7-segment display 300 is provided with a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. Each of the four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 has eight illuminated areas (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32, allowing the digits "0" to "9" to be displayed. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the probability of a jackpot. With a setting key (not shown) inserted, the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotation position. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 191, the machine can transition to a setting mode in which a setting value can be set. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1." However, this pachinko gaming machine PY1 only has one setting value, "1." Therefore, the setting value cannot be changed from "1." Note that, when the setting mode is set, rotating the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position ends the setting change mode and executes a RAM clear.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in Figure 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100, which is located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, only arcade employees who can open and close the front door 23 can operate the special reset switch 181. In other words, the special reset switch 181 can essentially be described as an operating means that cannot be operated by players. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be described in detail later. The main control board is also equipped with a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port unit 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals.

Various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by the various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to the various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first start gate sensor that detects game balls that have entered the first start gate 11, a second start gate sensor that detects game balls that have entered the second start gate 12, a general prize gate sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general prize gate 10, a gate sensor that detects game balls that have passed through the gate 13, a first large prize gate sensor that detects game balls that have entered the first large prize gate 14, a second large prize gate sensor 15a that detects game balls that have entered the second large prize gate 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects game balls that have passed through (entered) the specific area 16, and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detects game balls that have passed through (entered) the non-specific area 17.

The various sensors MS also include an outlet sensor that detects all game balls (total number of balls fired) flowing down the game area 6. Game balls that flow down outside the game area 6 pass through an outlet path (not shown) located at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2 and are discharged outside the pachinko game machine PY1. For this reason, the outlet sensor is located within the outlet path. The various sensors MS also include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetic field generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally cause game balls to enter the various winning ports 10, 11, 12, and 14. When each of the above sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detection content.

The various sensors MS also include a front door open sensor that detects the opening of the front door 23 relative to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects the opening of the front frame 23m relative to the game board mounting frame 2A. When the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detection content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detection content. The type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chute solenoid that drives the electric chute opening/closing member 12k of the electric chute 12D, a first large prize opening solenoid that drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first large prize device 14D, a second large prize opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second large prize device 15D, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D. The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Furthermore, displays 8 (special chart display 81, regular chart display 82, and special chart reserved display 83) are connected to the main control board 100. The display of these displays 8 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also sends various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 170 is connected to a card unit CU (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enabling ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a payout device 73, as well as to a launching device 72 via a launch control circuit 175. The launching device 72 includes a handle 72k (see Figure 1).

The payout control board 170 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "payout control microcomputer") 171, which is capable of executing control processes related to the payout of game balls in accordance with a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 includes a payout ROM that stores a program for controlling payouts, a payout RAM used as work memory, a payout CPU that executes the program stored in the payout ROM, and a payout I/O port unit (input/output circuit) for inputting and outputting data and signals.

The payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) uses the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls or pay out loan balls (loan balls) based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. For example, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 (wins), a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. This causes the game control microcomputer 101 to output a prize ball signal to the payout control board 170 indicating that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171, upon receiving the prize ball signal, uses the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls (e.g., three balls) based on the ball that entered the first start hole 11, based on the prize ball count information stored in the payout ROM. At this time, the paid-out game balls are detected by a prize ball sensor for counting, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor is output to the payout control board 170.

The launching device 72 is also equipped with a touch switch that can detect contact with the handle 72k (see Figure 1) by a player or other person. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. A launch volume knob that can detect the rotation angle (amount of operation) of the handle 72k is also connected to the launching device 72. The launching device 72 drives the launch solenoid so that gaming balls are launched with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the launch volume knob. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when rotation of the handle 72k is maintained, one gaming ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The payout control board 170 is also connected to the external terminal board 160. In other words, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal sent from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) located outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Information contained in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information about the game status, and information indicating errors or fraud (abnormalities). Note that while the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU via parallel communication, it may also be configured to transmit the outer end signal via asynchronous serial communication (a common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the dispensing control board 170 (for example, a relay board), or the main control board 100 and external terminal board 160 may be connected directly.

A balance display board 172 is also connected to the payout control board 170. The balance display board 172 controls the display of the number (number of game balls available for loan) shown on the balance display unit 61. In other words, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into the card unit CU, a signal containing information on the number of game balls available for loan is sent to the balance display board 172 via the payout control board 170. This causes the balance display board 172 to display a number corresponding to the number of game balls available for loan on the balance display unit 61. In this way, if the balance display unit 61 displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls available for loan, this indicates that ball loaning is possible.

A ball lending button sensor 62a (see Figure 6) is also provided, which can detect pressing of the ball lending button 62. The ball lending button sensor 62a is connected to the card unit CU via the balance display board 172 and the payout control board 170. Therefore, when the ball lending button sensor 62a detects pressing of the ball lending button 62, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. As a result, the card unit CU lends game balls using the payout control board 170 and the payout device 73. In other words, based on receiving a ball lending signal from the card unit CU, the payout control microcomputer 171 (ball lending control unit) uses the payout device 73 to pay out loaned balls (loan balls). The payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) also sends a signal containing information on the number of game balls that have been loaned to the balance display board 172. As a result, the balance display board 172 will display a new number corresponding to the number of game balls currently available for loan.

A return button sensor 63a (see Figure 6) is also provided that can detect pressing of the return button 63. The return button sensor 63a is connected to the card unit CU via the balance display board 172 and the payout control board 170. Therefore, when the return button sensor 63a detects pressing of the return button 63, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. This causes the card unit CU to remove a card containing information on the number of game balls currently available for loan. At this time, the balance display board 172 displays "0" on the balance display section 61 for a predetermined number of seconds, indicating that there are no game balls available for loan, and then the balance display section 61 does not display anything.

In addition, the main control board 100 sends various commands containing information about the game to the presentation control board 120 as the game progresses. Based on the various commands sent from the main control board 100, the presentation control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (the content of the game control) by the main control board 100. The connection between the main control board 100 and the presentation control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the main control board 100 to the presentation control board 120. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 100 and the presentation control board 120 as a means of regulating communication direction.

As shown in Figure 7, the effect control board 120 is equipped with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "effect control microcomputer") 121, which controls the effects of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 121 includes an effect ROM 123 that stores programs for controlling effects as the game progresses using the main control board 100, an effect RAM 124 used as work memory, and an effect CPU 122 that executes the programs stored in the effect ROM 123.

The performance ROM 123 also stores programs for performing the sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, and sub-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may also be external.

The effect control board 120 also includes an effect I/O port 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time. The RTC 139 operates on power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from a designated island power supply device (not shown). When power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the RTC 139 operates on power supplied from a backup power circuit 192 provided on the power supply board 190. This allows the RTC 139 to measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power circuit for the RTC 139 may also be provided on the effect control board 120. The backup power circuit can include a capacitor and an internal battery (such as a button battery).

An image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the display of the image display device 50 based on commands received from the main control board 100, i.e., in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 is a two-way communication connection that allows signals to be sent both from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. Naturally, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on a single chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically image data for characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), background images, etc.) for displaying images on the image display device 50.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and displays it in the display area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. The VDP 144 then appropriately combines the displayed image data and draws an image in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various performance images are displayed on the display screen 50a.

The display list consists of a group of commands that instruct the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters, such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the image transparency.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, i.e., in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100.

Audio data such as the sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. The audio control circuit 161 may be a board with a CPU mounted on it. In this case, the CPU may be made to perform audio control. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 52 may also be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be made to perform audio control. In this case, audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

The performance control board 120 is also connected to various switches that serve as inputs, various actuators SA that serve as drive sources, and various lamps SL via a specified relay board (not shown). Signals output by the various switches are input to the performance control board 120. The performance control board 120 also outputs signals to the various actuators SA. The performance control board 120 also controls the lighting of the various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

The various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a, a special button detection switch 41a, and a select button detection switch. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal to the performance control board 120 according to its detection content. The various switches connected to the performance control board 120 also include a handle rotation detection sensor 42a. The handle rotation detection sensor 42a detects (detects) rotation of the handle 72k (see Figure 1) by a player or other person, and is located inside the handle 72k. Therefore, when the handle 72k is rotated, the handle rotation detection sensor 42a detects the rotation of the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 120. The type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various actuators SA connected to the performance control board 120 include motors that drive the above-board movable devices 55, below-board movable devices 56, frame movable devices 58, etc., and can drive the motors to cause each movable device to perform a specified operation. In more detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operating mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. The type and number of actuators connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various lamps SL connected to the performance control board 120 include frame lamps 53, board lamps 54, etc., and cause each lamp to emit light. In more detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light-emitting pattern data (data that determines the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the light-emitting mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light-emitting pattern data. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light-emitting pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control circuit 151 board. In this case, the CPU may be configured to control the lighting of each lamp and the operation of each movable device. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to lighting patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. The type and number of lamps connected to the performance control board 120 may also be changed as appropriate, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

3-1. Games Related to Regular Maps First, we will explain games related to regular maps. When a launched game ball passes through the gate 13, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular map lottery. After the regular map lottery is performed, the regular map display 82 displays a variable regular map (a variable display followed by a static display). The statically displayed regular maps include winning and losing patterns. Note that the losing regular map patterns are also referred to as "losing regular maps" to distinguish them from the losing special map patterns described below. When a winning pattern is statically displayed, an auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when a losing regular map is statically displayed, no auxiliary game is played, and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. In the following, when a game ball passes through the gate 13 without the variable regular map display or auxiliary game being performed, this is referred to as "the establishment of the regular map variation start condition."

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs this series of games (regular symbol lottery, variable regular symbol display, auxiliary games), it acquires regular symbol-related random numbers when the regular symbol variation start conditions are met. The acquired regular symbol-related random numbers include regular symbol random numbers, as shown in Figure 10 (A). Regular symbol random numbers are random numbers (determination information) used to determine whether a win has occurred. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination Win determination is a determination to determine whether a win has occurred (whether or not a supplemental game is executed) using one or more win determination tables, such as those shown in FIG. 11(A). The win determination table can be associated with the game state, as described below. That is, the game state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and it is possible to distinguish between a win determination table used in the non-time-saving state (a non-time-saving win determination table) and a win determination table used in the time-saving state (a time-saving win determination table). In each win determination table, a determination value (a normal symbol random number value) of the normal symbol random number is assigned to the win or miss result of the win determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the win determination table to determine whether the win is a win or a miss. Then, based on the win determination result, a normal symbol variation pattern determination is performed to display the variable normal symbol. If the win determination result is a win, the winning symbol is basically displayed stationary in the variable normal symbol display. On the other hand, if the result of the winning judgment is a loss, the loss normal map is basically displayed as a static image on the variable display of the normal map. Also, the probability of winning can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Map fluctuation Map fluctuation pattern determination is a determination to determine the map fluctuation pattern using one or more map fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in Figure 11 (B). Map fluctuation patterns are identification information related to predetermined items related to the variable display of the map, such as map fluctuation time.

The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in a time-saving state (time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table).

Each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table stores one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, for each stopped normal map. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can vary the normal map fluctuation time between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when a losing normal map (a losing normal map) is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 30 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 30 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map. Also, in the time-saving state, when a losing normal map is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 5 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 5 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map. The variable display of the normal map with the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal map display device 82. Furthermore, the time for these map fluctuations can be changed as appropriate. In this way, hit detection and map fluctuation pattern determination are performed, and the map display 82 displays the map in a variable manner.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game Auxiliary game is executed when a winning symbol is displayed (derived) as a display result (a result of a regular symbol lottery) in the variable display of the regular symbol.

Auxiliary games include various elements that make up the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components), such as the number of times the electric chute 12D opens and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a game state. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using one or more auxiliary game control tables, such as those shown in FIG. 11 (C), based on the game state. The auxiliary game control tables are associated with game states. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. The number of times each element opens and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can vary the opening time of the electric chute 12D between auxiliary games in the non-time-shortened state and auxiliary games in the time-shortened state. For example, in auxiliary games in the non-time-shortened state, the electric chute 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D (e.g., 0.08 seconds)). Note that, below, auxiliary games in the non-time-shortened state are also referred to as "short-open auxiliary games." Also, in auxiliary games in the time-shortened state, the electric chute 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D (e.g., 3.00 seconds)). Note that, below, auxiliary games in the time-shortened state are also referred to as "long-open auxiliary games."

3-2. Games Related to Special Symbols Next, we will explain games related to special symbols. When a launched game ball enters the first starting hole 11, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 draws for special symbol 1. After the drawing for special symbol 1 is completed, the special symbol 1 display 81a displays a variable display of special symbol 1 (a static display after a variable display) to notify the result of the drawing for special symbol 1. Here, the statically displayed special symbol 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. In other words, the results of the drawing for special symbol 1 include a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. When a jackpot symbol is displayed statically, a jackpot game is executed, a new game state is established, and the game based on the winning is terminated. On the other hand, when a losing symbol is displayed statically, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is terminated.

Similarly, when a fired game ball enters the second starting hole 12, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 draws for Special Chart 2. When the drawing for Special Chart 2 is completed, the Special Chart 2 display 81b displays a variable Special Chart 2 (a variable display followed by a static display) to notify the result of the drawing for Special Chart 2. Here, the statically displayed Special Chart 2 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. In other words, the results of the drawing for Special Chart 2 include a jackpot and a losing symbol. When a jackpot symbol is displayed statically, a jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on that winning is terminated. On the other hand, when a losing symbol is displayed statically, the jackpot game is not executed, and the game based on that winning is terminated.

In the following, the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 11 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the first start condition," and the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 12 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the second start condition." Furthermore, the "fulfillment of the first start condition" and the "fulfillment of the second start condition" are collectively referred to as the "fulfillment of the start condition." Furthermore, the losing special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the aforementioned losing regular symbols.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs this series of games (special symbol lottery, variable display of special symbols, jackpot game, and game state setting), it acquires special symbol-related random numbers when the start conditions are met and makes various judgments about these random numbers. The acquired special symbol-related random numbers include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers, as shown in Figure 10 (B). Special symbol random numbers are random numbers used to make jackpot judgments. Jackpot symbol type random numbers are random numbers used to make jackpot symbol type judgments. Reach random numbers are random numbers used to make reach judgments. Special symbol variation pattern random numbers are random numbers used to make special symbol variation pattern judgments. An appropriate range is set for each random number. Note that random numbers are also sometimes referred to as judgment information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Determination Jackpot determination is a determination to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred (whether or not a jackpot game is executed) using one or more jackpot determination tables such as those shown in FIG. 12(A). The game state includes a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether the state is the normal probability state or the high probability state. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table).

In each jackpot determination table, a special symbol random number determination value (special symbol random number value) is assigned to the jackpot and miss results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss. As shown in Figure 12 (A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that determine a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot Symbol Type Determination Jackpot symbol type determination is a determination to determine the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using one or more jackpot symbol type determination tables as shown in Figure 12 (B) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is possible to associate each type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot consisting of the gaming benefits granted to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that is variably displayed; in other words, the type of starting gate from which the winning combination that resulted in the jackpot symbol type determination (which generated the jackpot symbol type determination) occurred. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between the jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing the variably displayed special symbol 1 (first jackpot symbol type determination table) and the jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing the variably displayed special symbol 2 (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, a determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type, which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number value is assigned appropriately to various jackpot symbols. Furthermore, the assignment rate for the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the number of jackpot symbol types can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in Figure 12 (B), the allocation rate for the jackpot symbol type determined for special chart 1 can be set to 50% for jackpot symbol X and 50% for jackpot symbol Y, and the allocation rate for the jackpot symbol type determined for special chart 2 can be set to 100% for jackpot symbol Z. In this way, it is possible to have different allocation rates for the jackpot symbol type between the drawing for special chart 1, which is conducted when a gaming ball enters the first starting gate 11, and the drawing for special chart 2, which is conducted when a gaming ball enters the second starting gate 12.

3-2-3. Reach judgment Reach judgment is a judgment to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the special chart variation performance described later when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss, using one or more reach judgment tables as shown in FIG.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between a reach determination table used in a non-time-saving state (a non-time-saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time-saving state (a time-saving reach determination table).

In each reach determination table, reach random number determination values (reach establishment random number values) are assigned to the reach determination results of "reach in hand (reach occurs)" and "reach not in hand (reach does not occur)." Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether or not a reach is in hand (whether or not a reach will occur). As shown in Figure 12 (C), it is possible to make the number of reach establishment random number values that are determined to be "reach in hand (reach will occur)" different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. Note that below, "reach in hand (reach will occur)," which is performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss," is sometimes referred to as "reach in hand, miss," and "no reach (reach not occurs)" is sometimes referred to as "no-reach, miss."

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuations The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is a determination to determine the fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) using one or more special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables) as shown in Figures 13 and 14, and is performed whether the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a miss. The special symbol fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items such as the special symbol fluctuation time and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special symbol fluctuation presentation described below. Note that the special symbol fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the results of the jackpot determination and the reach determination, in addition to the special symbol fluctuation time and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special symbol fluctuation presentation. It is possible to use multiple types of special symbol fluctuation patterns, each with different identification information, as special symbol fluctuation patterns, and the number of such patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that performs the variable display that is the subject of the determination; in other words, the type of starting gate where the winning result that resulted from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination occurred. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used when performing the variable display of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table: Figure 13) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used when performing the variable display of special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table: Figure 14).

Furthermore, each special chart fluctuation pattern determination table can also be associated with a game state. That is, it is possible to distinguish between the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving) and the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving). Similarly, it is possible to distinguish between the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving) and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving).

In addition, each special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associated with a game state can also be associated with a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, or a reach determination result. In other words, the non-time-saving special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table each have patterns for jackpots (by jackpot symbol type), reach and misses, and no reach and misses. Similarly, the time-saving special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table each have patterns for jackpots (by jackpot symbol type), reach and misses, and no reach and misses.

Furthermore, each special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss can also be associated with the number of reserved special charts. For example, it is possible to distinguish between a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. Furthermore, each special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss can also be associated with the number of reserved special charts. For example, it is possible to distinguish between a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 2 (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 2 (U2) is 3 to 4.

The special symbol display 81 then performs a variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol variation time according to the special symbol variation pattern determined by each special symbol variation pattern determination. When the jackpot symbol is displayed as a static display result (the result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game continues.

In addition, each special chart change pattern can be associated with a special chart change presentation flow as shown in the second column from the right in the tables in Figures 13 and 14.

As shown in the rightmost columns of the tables in Figures 13 and 14, special chart variation patterns are sometimes given names in association with the special chart (jackpot determination result) and the content of the special chart variation presentation. For example, a special chart variation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot variation." On the other hand, a special chart variation pattern in which an SP reach, a type of reach, occurs among a reach-and-miss is called an "SP miss variation," a special chart variation pattern in which an L reach, a type of reach, occurs among a reach-and-miss is called an "L miss variation," a special chart variation pattern in which a reach-and-miss ends the special chart variation presentation with an N reach, a type of reach, is called an "N miss variation," and a special chart variation pattern related to a no-reach miss is called a "normal miss variation."

3-2-5. Prediction Judgment The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a prediction judgment using one or more prediction judgment tables such as those shown in FIG. 15 based on the acquired special symbol-related random numbers. Prediction judgments include, for example, determining whether a special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment, determining which jackpot symbol type a jackpot symbol type a jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be, and determining which special symbol variation pattern a special symbol variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special symbol variation pattern judgment. The prediction judgment table can be associated with the type of start gate related to the start winning. In other words, it is possible to distinguish between a prediction judgment table (first prediction judgment table) for when a winning ball enters the first start gate 11 and a prediction judgment table (second prediction judgment table) for when a winning ball enters the second start gate 12.

The look-ahead judgment table can also be associated with the game state. That is, it is possible to distinguish between a look-ahead judgment table used when the game is not in a time-saving state (a look-ahead judgment table for non-time-saving) and a look-ahead judgment table used when the game is in a time-saving state (a look-ahead judgment table for time-saving).

In other words, it is possible to distinguish between the first pre-reading judgment table used when the time-saving state is not in effect, the first pre-reading judgment table used when the time-saving state is in effect, the second pre-reading judgment table used when the time-saving state is not in effect, and the second pre-reading judgment table used when the time-saving state is in effect. It should be noted that the types of judgments included in the pre-reading judgment can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, we will explain the jackpot game. The jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play accompanied by the opening and closing of the jackpot opening (first jackpot opening 14 or second jackpot opening 15), an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round of play, and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round of play until the end of the jackpot game. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play or the start of the ending. It is also possible to not have an OP or ED. Note that, hereinafter, a predetermined number of rounds of play (predetermined order) will simply be referred to as a "round." For example, the first round of play will be referred to as "1st round (1R)," and the tenth round of play will be referred to as "10th round (10R)."

The elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of rounds of play, the number of times the jackpot opening port (first jackpot opening 14 or second jackpot opening 15) is opened during each round of play, the type of jackpot opening and opening time (opening pattern) for each opening, the time it remains closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). After the special symbol is displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or more jackpot game control tables such as those shown in FIG. 16. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. It is possible to control one or more types of jackpot games as jackpot games.

For example, as shown in Figure 16, from Round 1 to Round 9, a round game is played in which the first large prize opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the first large prize opening 14 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. Then, in Round 10 (the final round), a round game is played in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in each round game, when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are detected by the large prize opening sensor, the round game is ended even before the maximum opening time of the large prize openings 14, 15 has elapsed.

The number of times and duration of each element can be changed as appropriate. The jackpot game can also be played using both the first jackpot slot 14 and the second jackpot slot 15, or just one of them.

The specific area 16 will now be described in detail. The specific area 16 is controlled by the distribution member 16k to assume a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won. Therefore, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be referred to as the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a certain operating mode (the specific area 16 is in a certain open/closed state). The difficulty (ease) of allowing a gaming ball to enter the specific area 16 during a jackpot game is determined by the combination of the certain operating mode of the distribution member 16k (the certain open/closed mode of the specific area 16) and the opening/closing mode of the second large prize opening 15 during a jackpot game. Hereinafter, the open state of the specific area 16 will also be referred to as "V-open."

For 15 seconds after the second large prize opening begins to open, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (Figure 3(B)). Therefore, in round games in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, it is easy for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to enter the specific area 16) due to the relationship between the opening time and timing of the second large prize opening 15 and the time and timing for which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. On the other hand, in round games in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, it is nearly impossible (difficult) for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to enter the specific area 16) due to the relationship between the opening time and timing of the second large prize opening 15 and the time and timing for which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. In this way, during a jackpot game, it is possible to execute two types of jackpot games: one in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distributing member 16k operate in a first opening pattern (V-long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"), and one in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distributing member 16k operate in a second opening pattern (V-short opening pattern) that makes it difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. In this way, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distributing member 16k operate in the V-long opening pattern is called a "V-long jackpot." On the other hand, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distributing member 16k operate in the V-short opening pattern is called a "V-short jackpot."

3-4. Game States Next, the game states will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko game machine PY1 can be set to any one of the game states of a "low-probability low base game state," a "low-probability high base game state," a "high-probability low base game state," a "high-probability high base game state," and a "jackpot game state." The "low-probability low base game state" can be abbreviated as a "low-probability low base state," the "low-probability high base game state" as a "low-probability high base state," the "high-probability low base game state" as a "high-probability low base state," and the "high-probability high base game state" as a "high-probability high base state." The game states include a state related to the probability of determining a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chute 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. The latter includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state.

The normal probability state is set in a "low probability, low base game state" or a "low probability, high base game state," and is a state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is normal. The high probability state is set in a "high probability, low base game state" or a "high probability, high base game state," and is a state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, the high probability state can be said to be a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is first turned on, the normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it is possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, during a jackpot game, it is possible to switch to the high probability state by the game ball passing through specific area 16. It is also possible to switch to the high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high probability state can be switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state by a predetermined number of jackpot determinations being made without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time-saving state is set in the "low-probability, low-base game state," "high-probability, low-base game state," or "jackpot game state." The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability, high-base game state" or "high-probability, high-base game state," and is a game state in which the opening time of the electric chute 12D during a single supplementary game is more likely to be longer than in the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 12D is longer (e.g., 3.00 seconds) than in the non-time-saving state (e.g., 0.08 seconds). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, a special symbol variation pattern determination table can be used to determine the special symbol variation pattern, which is designed to select a special symbol variation pattern with a shorter special symbol variation time more frequently than in the non-time-saving state (see Figures 13 and 14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of reserved special symbols is increased, making it easier for a valid win (a win that can be recorded as reserved special symbols) to occur in the starting slot. This allows for smooth gameplay and the aim of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the time-saving state can make it easier for the normal map change time to be shorter than the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, the normal map change time (5 seconds) is determined, which is shorter than the normal map change time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state allows for more normal map lottery draws to be performed per unit time.

In addition, it is possible to make it easier for a hit to be determined in the time-saving state compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a hit is determined with a higher probability (e.g., 59,936/65,536) than the probability of a hit being determined in the non-time-saving state (e.g., 6,600/65,536). Therefore, the number of times a hit is determined per unit time is greater in the time-saving state.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for a longer period of time per unit of time compared to the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 12 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, is higher. Therefore, in the time-saving state, where the base is high, players can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls they have. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to players than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is first powered on, it is set to the non-time-saving mode. Then, for example, the time-saving mode can be set by winning a jackpot. The time-saving mode can be changed from the time-saving mode to the non-time-saving mode by a predetermined number of jackpot determinations being made without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time-saving mode, compared to the non-time-saving mode, it is easier to win, the normal map fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter, and the electric chute 12D is more likely to be open for a single supplementary game. There are three points about normal map play that are advantageous to the player. However, these points may only be some of them.

The gaming state after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is first powered on is a "low-probability, low-base gaming state" in which the normal probability state and non-time-saving state are set. This gaming state is also called the "normal gaming state." In the "jackpot gaming state," hit determination is performed but not the jackpot determination, so the non-time-saving state is set upon the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to use all or some of the gaming states described above. Game states other than the normal gaming state, such as the "high-probability, high-base state," "high-probability, low-base state," "low-probability, high-base state," "high probability state," "time-saving state," "high-base state," and "jackpot gaming state," can be called "benefit gaming states" in which a benefit is granted to the player.

4. Main Effects of the Gaming Machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

4-1. Presentation Mode First, the presentation mode will be explained. Presentation mode refers to a category of presentation (or a higher-level conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set the following presentation modes: customer waiting presentation mode, normal presentation mode, probability variation presentation mode, time-saving presentation mode, and jackpot presentation mode.

The customer waiting mode can be set when special symbol variation effects are not being performed in the "low probability low base game state," "low probability high base game state," "high probability low base game state," and "high probability high base game state." This mode indicates a standby state in which special symbol variation effects are not being performed. When the customer waiting mode is set, the customer waiting effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-1), a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is being displayed, a settings screen G101 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-2), for configuring settings related to the effects of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The settings related to the effects include the volume setting for the sound output from the speaker 52, the brightness setting for the display screen 50a ("light intensity setting"), and the frequency setting for the effects to be executed ("effect setting").

The normal presentation mode can be set when a special symbol variation effect is being performed in a "low-probability, low-base game state" and indicates a non-time-saving mode. Normal presentation modes include, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting a daytime mountain scene (normal daytime background image G102) is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 18 (B-1); a second normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting an evening mountain scene (normal evening background image G103) is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 18 (B-2); and a third normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting a nighttime mountain scene (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 18 (B-3). Switching between these modes is based on one or more special symbol variation effects occurring without a jackpot win. Furthermore, each of the first through third normal presentation modes includes a normal pre-stage presentation mode before a reach is achieved during the special symbol variation effect, and a normal post-stage presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the normal first-stage presentation mode, the display screen 50a displays one of the daytime normal background image G102, evening normal background image G103, and nighttime normal background image G104. In the normal second-stage presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. A presentation in which the daytime normal background image G102, evening normal background image G103, or nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "normal mode presentation." This allows a player viewing the normal mode presentation to understand that the game state is controlled to the normal game state (low-probability, low-base game state). The normal presentation mode may also be set in the "high-probability, low-base game state," so that the "normal mode presentation" is executed even when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in the "high-probability, low-base game state." Alternatively, a special presentation mode that is set only in the "high-probability, low-base game state" may be provided.

The probability variation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in a "high-probability, high-base game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state. In the probability variation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), a background image representing space (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation mode includes a pre-probability variation presentation mode before a reach is achieved in the special symbol variation presentation, and a post-probability variation presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the pre-probability variation presentation mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, while in the post-probability variation presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. A presentation in which the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "probability variation mode presentation (advantageous presentation)." Players viewing the probability variation mode presentation can be made to understand that the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state (high-probability state and time-saving state).

The time-saving presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in a "low-probability, high-base game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates that the game is in both a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time-saving presentation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display screen 50a. The number of times the special symbol variation display will occur until the low-probability, high-base state ends is also displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving presentation mode includes a pre-time-saving presentation mode before a reach is achieved, and a post-time-saving presentation mode after a reach is achieved, in the special symbol variation presentation. In the pre-time-saving presentation mode, a time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a, while in the post-time-saving presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. The presentation in which the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "time-saving mode presentation." Players watching the time-saving mode effects can understand that the game state is being controlled to a low-probability, high-base state (normal probability state and time-saving state).

The jackpot presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot presentation mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-1), a jackpot opening presentation is performed on the display screen 50a, in which an opening image G107 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hit image G108 encouraging a "right hit" are displayed. During a round of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-2), a round presentation (advantageous presentation) is performed on the display screen 50a, in which a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds, a prize ball count image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out, and a background image depicting a town (round background image G114) are displayed. During the ending of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), a jackpot ending effect is displayed on the display screen 50a, in which an ending image G111 indicating the effect mode that will be set after the jackpot game and a total prize ball count image G112 indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game state are displayed.

The types of presentation modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special Symbol Variation Presentation Next, we will explain the special symbol variation presentation (also simply referred to as "variation presentation"). When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts the variable display of the special symbol, it executes the special symbol variation presentation based on the special symbol variation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination results, jackpot symbol type determination results, reach determination results, and special symbol variation pattern determination results). In the special symbol variation presentation, the display screen 50a displays a variation of the effect symbol superimposed on a predetermined background image. The effect symbol is composed of, for example, numeral symbols 1 to 9. In the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol changes with the start of the variable display of the special symbol and stops with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. In other words, after the variable display of the effect symbol is performed for the special symbol variation time, the variation stops and the effect symbol is displayed as a still image. The result of the special symbol lottery is then announced by the still image of the effect symbol.

In addition to the display of changing special symbols, other effects can be produced using various display devices such as the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, normal button 40, and special button 41. In this case, other effects can continue to be produced even after the display of the stopped symbol.

4-2-1. Display Area of the Display Device 50 As shown in FIG. 19(A), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be divided horizontally into three approximately equal sections: the left, center, and right sides, each with a left display area 50b1, a middle display area 50b2, and a right display area 50b3. The left display area 50b1 is an area that displays the left display area EZ1 when the display area is stopped during the special variable display. Similarly, the middle display area 50b2 and the right display area 50b3 are areas that display the middle display area EZ2 and the right display area EZ3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 19 (A), a small symbol area 50c can be provided in a section at the left end (upper left corner) of the top edge of the display screen 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area that variably displays small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when variable display of special symbols is being performed. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are composed of, for example, number symbols 1 to 9.

In Figure 19 (A), the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed double-dashed lines, but this is written to indicate the range of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal Variation In the special symbol variation effect, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform a normal variation. The normal variation functions as an effect that indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has begun.

When the variable display of the special symbols begins, for example, as shown in Figure 19(A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 (hereinafter referred to as "effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3" or "effect symbols EZ") are displayed frozen on the display screen 50a, along with the left small symbol KZ1, the middle small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3. The variable display of the special symbols is not taking place, and the state is waiting for the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in Figure 19(B), upon the start of the variable display, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 begins, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 also begins. Note that the "↓" in Figure 19 indicates that the symbols are currently being displayed. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal miss variation," as shown in Fig. 19 (C-1), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stop in different stop patterns, and then, as shown in Fig. 19 (D), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop and display in a stop pattern suggesting a miss (so-called barrage). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 also stop and display all at once in a stop pattern suggesting a miss. There are several types of stop patterns suggesting a miss, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6," in which the left and right symbols are not the same. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as an "N miss variation," as shown in Figure 19 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping pattern (a so-called reach eye), and a reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 continues, and a reach effect is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. Note that the stopping order and stopping pattern of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N Reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N Reach when a reach is achieved during normal variation. N Reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot," and functions as a presentation to make the player expect a jackpot.

In an N reach, as shown in Figure 20 (A), the reach-established state is maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and as shown in Figure 20 (B), the rate of change of the middle effect symbol EZ2 gradually slows down. If the special symbol change pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N miss change," the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a stopping pattern that suggests a reach miss (a so-called reach miss), as shown in Figure 20 (C-1). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a stopping pattern that suggests a reach miss. There are several types of stopping patterns that suggest a reach miss, such as "7-6-7" and "5-3-5," where the left and right symbols are the same but the center symbol is different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N jackpot variation," it is displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot (so-called double numbers), as shown in Figure 20 (C-2). There are several types of stop patterns suggesting a jackpot, such as "7-7-7" and "2-2-2," in which the left, right, and center symbols are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot. Note that the effects of the N reach are not limited to the gradual deceleration of the center effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform an SP reach after an N reach. The SP reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination is more likely to be a "jackpot" than an N reach, and functions as a presentation to make the player expect a jackpot.

In an SP Reach, after an N Reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), a background image dedicated to the SP Reach (SP Reach background image G113) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and an image indicating the start of the SP Reach (SP Reach start title image) G1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(B), a special SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final stage of the SP Reach effect is reached, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation," as shown in FIG. 21(C-1), an effect suggesting a jackpot (e.g., a display showing the main character rejoicing after winning the battle) is performed on the display screen 50a, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state suggesting a jackpot (so-called double numbers). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed in a stopped state suggesting a jackpot. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP Miss Variation," as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), an effect suggesting a miss (for example, an enemy character displaying joy at winning a battle) is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a reach miss. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a manner suggesting a miss. The effect content of the SP reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, we will explain in detail the possibility that the EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 display symbols for each reach will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation, winning expectation). The jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of the jackpot determination. For example, if the execution probability of an N reach is set to 10% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," and the execution probability of an SP reach is set to 4% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," then it is possible to set the jackpot expectation for an SP reach higher than the jackpot expectation for an N reach. Furthermore, if SP Reach A and SP Reach B are executable as SP reaches, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 20% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," and the execution probability of SP Reach B is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," then it is possible to set the jackpot expectation rate for SP Reach B higher than that of SP Reach A. In this way, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation rate by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination.

4-3. Hold Icon Display Area The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a hold icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The hold icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. A hold icon HA can be displayed in each display area 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, or 50d4 depending on the number of special 1 or special 2 reservations. For example, if the number of special 1 reservations is "1," the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and if the number of special 1 reservations is "2," the hold icon HA is displayed in both the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(A), an icon display area 50e consisting of a single display area can be provided near the reserved icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display an icon TA that is the same as or different from the reserved icon HA in response to the start of the special chart change performance.

The number of display areas that make up the hold icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Also, the hold icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special chart 1 hold number and the special chart 2 hold number, or a display area that displays only one of them.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a hold effect in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. The hold effect can notify the player of the number of special 1 reserves or special 2 reserves.

In the hold effect, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 while the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 is "0," the special chart change effect begins, and the icon TA is displayed in the icon display area 50e, as shown in FIG. 22(B). Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting hole 11 during the special chart change effect, the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 22(C), and the player is notified that the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 is "2." After that, when the special chart change presentation ends and a new special chart change presentation begins, as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the reserve icon HA that was displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the reserve icon display area 50d moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the reserve icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the reserve icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed, and the player is notified that the number of reserved special charts 1 is "1".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a notice performance at any timing during the special symbol variation performance. The notice performance is a performance using the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, buttons 40, 41, etc., and can suggest the results of the jackpot determination and the special symbol variation pattern determination.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect as a preview effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58. The movable body effect is an effect in which the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are activated, and functions as an effect to make the player anticipate a jackpot.

In the movable body effect, for example, when an N reach progresses to an SP reach, as shown in FIG. 23(A), the above-board movable device 55 and the below-board movable device 56 are activated, and the above-board movable device 55k and the below-board movable device 56k move so that they overlap on the display screen 50a as seen by the player, suggesting that the game will progress to an SP reach. At this time, an effect image is displayed in the space on the display screen 50a that does not overlap with the above-board movable device 55k and the below-board movable device 56k. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the above-board movable device 55k and the below-board movable device 56k return to their normal standby state (initial position), and the game progresses to an SP reach. Note that the movable body effect is not limited to suggesting the game will progress to an SP reach, and can be modified or added as appropriate. Furthermore, the operation of the movable devices in the movable body effect can be modified or added as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform operation effects as advance notice effects using the normal buttons 40 and the special buttons 41. The operation effects are effects in which the player operates the normal buttons 40 and the special buttons 41, and function as effects that make the player anticipate a big win.

In the operation presentation, for example, in an SP reach, a period (a button operation valid period) occurs during which pressing the special button 41 is valid. When this button operation valid period begins, a presentation (a button operation prompt presentation) is presented to prompt the player to press the special button 41, as shown in FIG. 24(A). In the button operation prompt presentation, a button operation prompt image G3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The button operation prompt image G3 includes an image (special button image G31) that resembles the special button 41, an image (a press operation image G32) that represents the operation mode of the special button 41 (i.e., the press operation), and an image (a remaining valid operation period image G33) that represents the remaining time in the valid button operation period. The remaining valid operation period image G33 is comprised of a generally curved progress bar that changes over time to allow the player to easily understand the remaining time in the valid operation period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the valid button operation period, or after the valid button operation period has elapsed without the special button 41 being operated, the on-board movable device 55 is activated as shown in FIG. 24(B), and as seen by the player, the on-board movable body 55k moves so that it overlaps with the display screen 50a, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. Note that the operational effects are not limited to the activation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a pre-reading effect for the special chart 1 reserve or special chart 2 reserve for which the special chart lottery has not yet been held as a notice effect. The pre-reading effect functions as an effect to suggest in advance the result of the special chart lottery for the special chart 1 reserve or special chart 2 reserve.

In the pre-reading effect, for example, if the result of the pre-reading judgment for the special chart 1 reserve is a "jackpot," the reserve icon HA, which is normally displayed as a "circle," may be displayed as a "☆" in the reserve icon display area 50d, as shown in Figure 22 (C). Furthermore, if the result of the pre-reading judgment is a "miss," the reserve icon HA may be displayed as a "☆" as a so-called false effect. Note that the pre-reading effect can be performed on both or either the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve. Furthermore, it is not limited to changing the display mode of the reserve icon HA, and it can be changed or added as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to change the stopping mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special chart variation effect.

5. Display on 7-Segment Display Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) will be described. The 7-segment display 300 displays the normal base, which is the ratio of the total number of normal prize balls acquired by the player in normal game mode to the number of normal shot balls fired by the player in normal game mode, as a percentage (%). Note that the 7-segment display 300 does not display bases other than the normal base (such as the time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in time-saving mode to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in time-saving mode, and the jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls acquired by the player in jackpot game mode to the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in jackpot game mode).

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 constantly counts the number of balls fired normally, the total number of prize balls fired normally, and the total number of prize balls fired. The total number of balls fired refers to the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of balls fired is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting detections from the outlet sensor. The number of balls fired normally is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting detections from the outlet sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of prize balls normally is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state.

The information on the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300 is stored in a specific memory area (not shown) of the non-erasable memory section 107 (see Figure 6) of the game RAM 104. Therefore, even if RAM clearing is performed, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls is maintained (not erased). In this way, even if RAM clearing is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the number of normal shot balls and the total number of normal prize balls at the time of power cut-off. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value in the right two digits of the 7-segment display 300 (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see Figure 9)) regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.).

Here, the normal base is calculated in increments of 60,000 total shots. In other words, the normal base calculated from the time the power is first turned on after shipping from the factory until the total number of shots reaches 60,000 will be the initial normal base. After that, if the total number of shots exceeds 60,001, the value that was the initial normal base will be stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated from the time the total number of shots goes from 60,001 to 120,000 will be the current normal base. After that, if the total number of shots goes beyond 120,001, the value that was the previous normal base will be stored as the normal base two shots ago, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base one shot ago. Then, the normal base calculated from the time the total number of shots goes from 12,0001 to 180,000 will be the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 18,0001, the value that was the normal base two shots ago is stored as the normal base three shots ago, the value that was the normal base one shot ago is stored as the normal base two shots ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one shot ago. The normal base calculated from when the total number of shots goes from 18,0001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base three shots ago is erased, the value that was the normal base two shots ago is stored as the normal base three shots ago, the value that was the normal base one shot ago is stored as the normal base two shots ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one shot ago. The normal base calculated from when the total number of shots goes from 24,0001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is calculated every time the total number of shots reaches 60,000, and values up to three shots ago are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can store a maximum of the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base in the non-erasable memory section 107 of the game RAM 104. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 switches the display on the 7-segment display 300 every 5 seconds between the following: current normal base ⇒ previous normal base ⇒ second previous normal base ⇒ third previous normal base ⇒ current normal base.

Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see Figure 9)), the current normal base is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340). Therefore, someone who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) displayed in the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, five seconds after the current normal base begins to be displayed, the 7-segment display 300 will show "b1" in the two left digits and the previous normal base in the two right digits. Therefore, anyone who sees "b1" in the two left digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the two right digits is the previous normal base.

Then, five seconds after the previous normal base value begins to be displayed, the 7-segment display 300 will show "b2" in the two left digits and the previous normal base value in the two right digits. Therefore, anyone who sees "b2" in the two left digits can understand that the value (normal base value) shown in the two right digits is the previous normal base value.

Then, five seconds after the display of the second-to-last normal base begins, the 7-segment display 300 will show "b3" in the two left digits and the third-to-last normal base in the two right digits. Therefore, anyone who sees "b3" in the two left digits can understand that the value shown in the two right digits (normal base) is the third-to-last normal base.

Then, five seconds after the display of the third previous normal base begins, the 7-segment display 300 will show "bL" in the left two digits and the current normal base in the right two digits, as described above, and the same process will be repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired since the power was first turned on after shipping from the factory is 300 or less, the right two digits will display "--". In other words, if the total number of balls fired is 300 or less, the normal base value will not be displayed, and once the total number of balls fired exceeds 300, the normal base value will be displayed. In this way, when the total number of balls fired is 300 or less, the denominator value of the normal base (the number of normal balls fired) is too small, avoiding the display of an unreliable normal base value. Furthermore, even if the total number of balls fired is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeatedly display "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every five seconds.

Furthermore, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of normal balls fired since the first power-on after shipping is 6,000 or less, the left two digits "bL," "b1," "b2," or "b3" will flash. Then, if the number of normal balls fired since the first power-on after shipping exceeds 6,000, the left two digits "bL" will light up. Then, if the total number of balls fired since the first power-on after shipping is 60,000 or more, the left two digits "b1" will light up. If the total number of balls fired since the first power-on after shipping is 120,000 or more, the left two digits "b2" will light up. Then, if the total number of balls fired since the first power-on after shipping is 120,000 or more, the left two digits "b3" will light up. In this way, when a person checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 sees the left two digits flashing, it is possible to let them know that the normal base value shown in the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. In other words, when a person checking the normal base sees the left two digits lit up, it is possible to let them know that the normal base value shown in the right two digits has converged to a certain extent.

Furthermore, when the 7-segment display 300 transitions to setting mode after power-on, the setting value ("1") is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value ("1") is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the device is in setting mode.

In addition, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display after power is turned on and before the normal base display begins. As mentioned above, when transitioning to setting mode after power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting change mode ends. The initial display on the 7-segment display 300 lights up all of the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see Figure 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340. In other words, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after power is turned on indicates that the 7-segment display 300 is operating normally.

6. Excessive Prize Ball Prevention Function Next, the excess prize ball prevention function will be described. In the present pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of activating the excess prize ball prevention function to prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Specifically, the excess prize ball prevention function disables gameplay if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (a reference number). Here, the difference in the number of balls (specific measurement number) refers to the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls refers to the number of prize balls that the player will win (pay out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high-probability high base state, low-probability high base state, etc.). Note that the total number of prize balls refers to the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but it may also refer to the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. As described above, the total number of shot balls refers to the number of shot balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of winning balls as soon as the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of winning balls is stored in the total winning ball count memory section 107a (see Figure 6) provided in the non-erasable memory section 107 of the game RAM 104. The game control microcomputer 101 also counts the total number of shot balls as soon as the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total shooting ball count memory section 107b (see Figure 6) provided in the non-erasable memory section 107 of the game RAM 104. The game control microcomputer 101 also subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of winning balls as soon as the power is turned on to calculate the difference in the number of winning balls, and information on the calculated difference in the number of winning balls is stored in the difference in the number of winning balls memory section 107c (see Figure 6) provided in the non-erasable memory section 107 of the game RAM 104.

Therefore, even when RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the total number of shot balls, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the non-erasable memory unit 107. In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of winning balls at the time of power cut and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cut. Note that if the value of the total number of shot balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls, the game control microcomputer 101 treats the difference in the number of balls as a negative value.

In this embodiment, when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control processing related to the game (the processing of steps S102 to S108 described below, see Figure 32), but also stops the launch control processing for launching game balls (the processing of step 109 described below, see Figure 32). Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, game balls will not be launched, and the player can immediately realize that they are unable to play. Furthermore, when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, thereby no longer receiving signals corresponding to the detection content from the various sensors MS, no longer performing display control of the displays 8 and 7-segment display 300, no longer operating the various actuators MA, and no longer outputting external end signals to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

After the excess ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which game play cannot be performed continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the activation of the excess ball prevention function is deactivated when a RAM clear is executed. That is, after the excess ball prevention function is activated, an amusement facility employee turns off the power by turning the power switch 193 OFF. Then, when turning the power switch 193 ON to turn the power on, the amusement facility employee presses the RAM clear switch 191. This executes a RAM clear, allowing the game control microcomputer 101 to execute game control processing and launch control processing related to game play. Thus, in this embodiment, after the excess ball prevention function is activated, game play cannot be resumed simply by turning the power OFF and ON (re-inserting); game play can be resumed by executing a RAM clear.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function activates will be explained based on Figure 25. The excessive prize ball prevention function activates when the game transitions from an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player to a normal game state, provided that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not necessarily activate when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000. In this embodiment, an advantageous game state refers to a high-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game, or a low-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game.

For example, suppose the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in Figure 25 (A). Of course, at this time, the excess prize ball prevention function does not activate. Next, suppose the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in Figure 25 (B). At this time, the excess prize ball prevention function does not activate. Subsequently, even when transitioning from this jackpot gaming state to the high probability high base state, the excess prize ball prevention function does not activate. After that, as shown in Figure 25 (C), when transitioning from the high probability high base state to the normal gaming state occurs, the excess prize ball prevention function activates. In this way, in this form, gameplay does not stop in the middle of the jackpot gaming state or the high probability high base state, and it is possible for the player to end gameplay at a convenient time when the advantageous gaming state has ended.

In this embodiment, information on the difference in the number of balls is stored in the difference in the number of balls memory unit 107c of the non-deletion memory unit 107, and the difference in the number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. And as mentioned above, even if RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls is not reset. This is for the following reasons.

Even during business hours, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may experience situations where the power is turned off and on (restarted) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, malfunctions, severe fraud, etc. In such situations, if the difference in ball count were reset by restarting the power or clearing the RAM, the purpose of the excess prize ball prevention function would be defeated. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or severe fraud occurs, it could give an unfair advantage to players who resume play after the occurrence of the bug, malfunction, or severe fraud by making it more difficult for the excess prize ball prevention function to activate. Therefore, in this embodiment, to prevent players from receiving the above-mentioned unfair advantage, the difference in ball count is not reset by restarting the power or clearing the RAM.

Next, the conditions for resetting the difference in ball count will be explained based on Figure 26. In this embodiment, there are two reset conditions for resetting the difference in ball count. The first reset condition is when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, as shown in Figure 26 (A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the special reset switch 181 being pressed, it clears the difference in ball count information stored in the difference in ball count memory unit 107c of the non-erasure memory unit 107. Note that when the difference in ball count information stored in the difference in ball count memory unit 107c is reset (cleared), the total number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball count memory unit 107a and the total number of shot balls stored in the total shot ball count memory unit 107b are also reset; however, hereinafter, this will simply be referred to as "the difference in ball count being reset (cleared)." Note that Figure 26 (A) shows a case where the difference in the number of balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed in the waiting state for customers, but the difference in the number of balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed in any game state (for example, normal game state).

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in Figure 26 (A). In other words, if no game is played for one hour after the transition to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the information on the difference in ball number stored in the difference in ball number memory unit 107c of the non-deletion memory unit 107. The customer waiting state is a game state in which no game is being played and the special symbol remains stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are in place for the following reasons. For example, as shown in Figures 26(A) and 26(B), suppose that a player's play causes the difference in ball count to reach 70,000 in the jackpot game state. The player then transitions from the jackpot game state to the high-probability, high-base state and then to the normal game state, and ends the game. In this case, if the difference in ball count increases slightly (within 10,000) for the next player to start playing, the excess prize ball prevention function may be activated, putting the player at a great disadvantage.

In this embodiment, the difference in balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181, as shown in Figure 26 (A). This allows an arcade employee to reset the difference in balls by pressing the special reset switch 181 at any time after a player has finished playing. Also, as shown in Figure 26 (B), if the waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished playing and the difference in balls is automatically reset. This allows the difference in balls to be reset without placing the burden of resetting operations on arcade employees. By setting the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player from being put at a significant disadvantage by having the excess prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting play.

Next, the presentation mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on Figure 27(A). When the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in Figure 27(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, along with an error cancellation method image ERX indicating "Error X, over-prize ball abnormality, please clear RAM." A game stop sound is also output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. Thus, the presentation mode shown in Figure 27(A) allows the player to immediately recognize that they are unable to play. The presentation mode shown in Figure 27(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in Figure 27(A) is canceled when RAM is cleared, but will continue as is if the power is simply turned back on.

Here, we will explain what happens when an illegal magnetism is detected in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. When an illegal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. This causes the game control microcomputer 101 to stop the game control processing and launch control processing related to the game, just as when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be played due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control processing and launch control processing related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (re-applying the power).

Next, the presentation mode when an illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 27(B). When an illegal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, as shown in FIG. 27(B), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, along with an error cancellation method image ER1 indicating "Error 1: Magnetic field detection abnormality. Please turn the power back on." A game stop sound is also output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. Comparing the presentation mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 27(A)) and the presentation mode when an illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 27(B)), they are identical except for the cancellation method image. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for arcade employees and players to recognize that gameplay is impossible when an illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

Next, the presentation mode when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 (preliminary standard number, specific number) will be explained based on Figure 28 (A). As a prerequisite, let's assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in Figure 25 (A). First, as shown in Figure 28 (A), a round presentation is being executed on the display screen 50a, displaying the round image G109, the prize ball count image G110, and the round background image G114. Then, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple-bordered image EFa is displayed on the edge of the display screen 50a, and an over-prize ball warning image KY, indicating "10,000 remaining balls and an over-prize ball abnormality," is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The display of the purple-bordered image EFa and the over-prize ball warning image KY allows the player to understand that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation (the difference in the number of balls is approaching 80,000). The purple-bordered image EFa continues to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state has ended, but the display of the over-prize ball warning image KY ends when the jackpot gaming state has ended. The over-prize ball warning image KY may also continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state has ended, by constantly indicating the remaining number of balls until it reaches 80,000.

Next, the presentation mode when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 (the reference number) will be explained based on Figure 28 (B). As a prerequisite, let us assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in Figure 25 (B). As shown in Figure 28 (B), the display screen 50a is executing a round presentation in which the round image G109, the prize ball count image G110, and the round background image G114 are displayed. Then, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000, a red-bordered image EFb is displayed on the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop warning image KH indicating "game stopped due to end of high base state" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The display of the red-bordered image EFb and the game stop warning image KH allows the player to understand that the game is approaching a stop and when the game will stop. The display of the red-bordered image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state has ended, but the display of the game stop warning image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state has ended. Note that the game stop warning image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state has ended. The display of this game stop warning image KH corresponds to a "game unplayable warning effect."

In this way, in this embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the game stop warning image KH shown in Figure 28 (B) is displayed to warn players that the game will become impossible to play when the high-probability high base state or low-probability high base state ends (when the game transitions to the normal game state). This allows players to be aware in advance that the game will become impossible to play, and to know in advance when the game will become impossible to play. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from being confused even if the game suddenly becomes impossible to play when the high-probability high base state or low-probability high base state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 or more, an over-prize ball warning image KY (see Figure 28(A)) is displayed, warning that the game is approaching the point where it will no longer be possible to play. Then, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, a game stop warning image KH (see Figure 28(B)) is displayed, warning that the game will no longer be possible to play. In this way, it is possible to gradually allow the player to understand in advance the situations in which the game will no longer be possible to play, making it easier for them to understand the current situation.

Here, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in Figure 25 (A), the presentation mode in the high probability, high base state is as shown in Figure 29 (A). That is, as shown in Figure 29 (A), the display screen 50a is executing a high probability mode presentation in which the high probability background image G105 is displayed, and the presentation pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple-bordered image EFa is displayed on the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple-bordered image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000 and that the situation in which the excess prize ball prevention function will be activated is approaching.

Furthermore, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in Figure 25 (B), the presentation mode in the high probability, high base state is as shown in Figure 29 (B). That is, as shown in Figure 29 (B), the display screen 50a is executing a high probability mode presentation in which the high probability background image G105 is displayed, and the presentation pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, a red-bordered image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This red-bordered image EFb allows the player to play while understanding that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000, ending the high base state and activating the excessive prize ball prevention function.

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (A), we will explain the presentation that occurs when the difference in balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, an amusement parlor employee opens the front door 23 relative to the outer frame 22 and presses the special reset switch 181. As a result, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the display screen 50a displays an error resolution method image ER2 indicating "Error 2: Please close the front door," as shown in Figure 30 (A). At this time, a difference in balls reset notification image CLS indicating "Difference in balls has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This allows the amusement parlor employee to understand that the difference in balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (B), we will explain the presentation when the waiting state continues for one hour. In this case, the display screen 50a displays the waiting demo video G100. At this time, as shown in Figure 30 (B), a ball difference reset notification image CLS indicating "The ball difference has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for arcade staff to understand that the ball difference has been reset.

7. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer [Main Control Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to Figures 31 to 47. Note that counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc., which appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 101, are provided in the game RAM 104. When the power to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in Figure 31 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, the main control main processing first performs power-on processing (step S001).

The power-on process (S001) performs initial settings such as stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, gaming CPU 102 setting, SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) setting, setting the gaming RAM 104 work area when power is restored, and resetting various flags, status, counters, etc. The initial value of a flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of a status is "1", and the initial value of a counter is "0". Note that the power-on process (S001) is executed only once after power is turned on and is not executed thereafter.

Furthermore, in the power-on processing (S001), when a signal based on pressing the RAM clear switch 191 is input, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a RAM clear. When a RAM clear is executed, game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, information on the game state such as a high probability state, the number of reserved special symbols, and the results of determining whether a jackpot has been won) is erased. However, even if a RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball count memory unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls memory unit 107b, and the information on the difference in number of balls stored in the difference in number of balls memory unit 107c are not cleared.

In this power-on processing (S001), if the game stop flag, described below, is ON and a RAM clear is executed, it will be switched OFF. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON and a RAM clear is not executed, it will remain ON. In other words, simply turning the power back on will not change the state of the game stop flag. Thus, whether or not game play will resume after the game stop flag is turned ON by the activation of the excess prize ball prevention function depends on whether or not a RAM clear is executed.

Following the power-on process (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. When each random number counter value reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0," and may be changed randomly. Each random number may also be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. In other words, it is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is repeatedly executed.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in Figure 32, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) first determines whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is skipped. This makes it impossible to play. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the input processing described below is then executed (S102).

Next, the normal and special symbol main random number update process is executed (S103). The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of Figure 31. Next, the sensor detection process is executed (S104).

The sensor detection process (S104) sequentially performs general prize entry sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second start entry sensor processing, first start entry sensor processing, first large prize entry sensor processing, second large prize entry sensor processing, specific area sensor processing, and outlet sensor processing. The commands generated in each process are then set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The general prize opening sensor process determines whether a game ball has been detected by the general prize opening sensor. Furthermore, a command for the general prize opening sensor is generated based on the results of this process.

The gate sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the gate sensor. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is obtained, and the obtained normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that if a predetermined number of normal symbol random numbers (for example, four) are stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106, the newly obtained normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a command for the gate sensor is generated depending on the results of this process.

The second start port sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second start port sensor. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, special symbol 2-related random numbers consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter are acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are stored in the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b has multiple memory areas, from area 1 to area n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2), and the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are stored in order, starting from area 1. Note that if special symbol 2-related random numbers have been stored up to area n, the newly acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are not stored. In addition, a second look-ahead judgment is made using the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers and a second look-ahead judgment table. In addition, depending on the results of this processing, a command for the second start gate sensor is generated, which includes a special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of special chart 2 related random numbers (special chart 2 reserved number) stored in the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b and a second start winning command indicating the result of the second pre-read judgment.

The first start gate sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first start gate sensor. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, special symbol 1 related random numbers consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter are acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are stored in the special symbol 1 reserve memory unit 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special symbol 1 reserve memory unit 105a has multiple memory areas, from area 1 to area n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2), and the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are stored in order, starting from area 1. Note that if special symbol 1 related random numbers have been stored up to area n, newly acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are not stored. In addition, a first pre-reading judgment is made using the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers and the first pre-reading judgment table. In addition, depending on the results of this processing, a command for the first start gate sensor is generated, which includes a special chart 1 reserved number command representing the number of special chart 1-related random numbers (special chart 1 reserved number) stored in the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a and a first start winning command representing the result of the first pre-read judgment.

The first large prize opening sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first large prize opening sensor. It also generates a command for the first large prize opening sensor according to the results of this process.

The second large prize opening sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second large prize opening sensor. It also generates a command for the second large prize opening sensor according to the results of this process.

The specific area sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the specific area sensor. Furthermore, a command for the specific area sensor is generated depending on the results of this process.

The outlet sensor process determines whether a game ball has been detected by the outlet sensor.

After the sensor detection process (S104) shown in Figure 32, the game control microcomputer 101 executes normal operation processing (S105). In the normal operation processing (S105), normal symbol waiting processing, normal symbol variation processing, normal symbol determination processing, and auxiliary game control processing are performed in sequence. The commands generated in each process are then set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and auxiliary play are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a win determination is made based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106. In addition, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination is made based on the current game state to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. A normal symbol fluctuation start command is then generated that includes information regarding the results of the win determination and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. Then, the normal symbol display unit 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol fluctuation time associated with the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Normal pattern change processing is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal map. In the normal pattern change processing, the normal map is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination as the normal map change time elapses since the variable display of the currently running normal map began. Then, a normal map change stop command is generated, indicating the end of the variable display of the normal map.

The normal symbol determination process is performed when a normal symbol is displayed as stopped. During the normal symbol determination process, a determination is made as to whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol after a predetermined stop time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stopped display of the active normal symbol. If a winning symbol is displayed as stopped, auxiliary play is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of auxiliary play is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. The auxiliary game control process controls the auxiliary game based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, an auxiliary game control command is generated depending on the results of this process.

After the normal operation process (S105) shown in Figure 32, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the difference ball count measurement process (S106) and the special operation process (S107), which will be described later. Next, it executes the sorting device control process (S108) to control the sorting device 16D.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a launch control process to control the launch of the game ball (S109). In other words, by executing the launch control process (S109), the player can launch the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the launch control process (S109) is not executed, the player cannot launch the game ball even by rotating the handle 72k.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process to control the display of the 7-segment display 300 (S110). Next, it executes error processing to determine whether an error (illegal) has occurred due to magnetic detection or an error due to the front door 23 or front frame 23m being open (S111). In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether an illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated depending on the results of this processing. Also in the error processing (S111), it is determined whether the front door 23 or front frame 23m is open using the front door open sensor or front frame sensor. Then, a frame open command is generated depending on the results of this processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the output processing described below (S112). Subsequently, it executes other processing (S113). Examples of other processing (S113) include controlling the display mode of the special symbol reservation indicator 83 to indicate the number of reserved special symbols based on the number of reserved symbols, updating the timer, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 then executes a power interruption monitoring process when the power is cut off (S114), and ends this process. In the power interruption monitoring process (S114), if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it stores game information, information on the total number of winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls, information on the difference in the number of balls, information on the game stop flag, etc. in a specified memory area of the game RAM 104. After that, it sets a prohibition on access to the game RAM 104.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 33, the input processing (S102) first determines whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, i.e., whether a signal based on the operation of pressing the special reset switch 181 has been received (S201). If it is not ON (NO in S201), proceed to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), execute the non-erase clear processing (S202). In the non-erase clear processing (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number memory unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total shot ball number memory unit 107b, and the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the difference in the number of balls memory unit 107c are cleared. Note that even when the non-erase clear processing (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific memory area (not shown) of the non-erase memory unit 107 is not cleared. This is because, as described above, this information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. When the non-erase clear command is sent to the performance control board 120, a ball difference reset notification image CLS is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 30 (A). In step S204, other processing is performed, and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the gaming control microcomputer 101, for example, receives a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores this in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data.

[Difference in Number of Balls Measurement Process] As shown in Figure 34, in the difference in number of balls measurement process (S106), first, a total prize ball count process is executed (S301) to count the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player. Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total prize ball count memory unit 107a (see Figure 6). Next, a total shot ball count process is executed (S302) to count the total number of shot balls based on detection by the outlet sensor. Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total shot ball count memory unit 107b (see Figure 6). Then, a difference in number of balls calculation process is executed (S303) to calculate the difference in number of balls by subtracting the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls. Information on the calculated difference in number of balls is stored in the difference in number of balls memory unit 107c (see Figure 6). In the ball difference calculation process (S303), the game control microcomputer 101 may send a ball difference command containing information about the calculated ball difference to the presentation control board 120, allowing the presentation control microcomputer 121 to sequentially grasp the ball difference.

Next, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notification flag is OFF. The over-prize ball notification flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned ON (S306), and an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the presentation control board 120, a purple-bordered image EFa and an over-prize ball notification image KY are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28 (A).

Next, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned ON (S310). Then, an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process ends. When the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the presentation control board 120, a red-bordered image EFb and a game stop warning image KH are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28 (B).

[Special operation processing] As shown in Figure 35, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing related to the special chart display 81 and the large prize device (first large prize device 14D, second large prize device 15D) is divided into four stages, and "special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302); if the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), it performs special symbol changing processing (S1304); if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), it performs special symbol determination processing (S1306); and if the "special operation status" is "4" (NO in S1301, S1303, and S1305), it performs special electric device processing (S1307). The special operation status is initially set to "1."

[Special Symbol Waiting Process] As shown in FIG. 36, the special symbol waiting process (S1302) first determines whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" (S1401). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), i.e., if there is no memory of a set of random number counter values acquired as a result of a winning entry into the second starting port 12, it determines whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 11 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), i.e., if there is no memory of a set of random number counter values acquired as a result of a winning entry into the first starting port 11, it determines whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), the customer waiting measurement process described below is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), and the customer waiting flag is set ON (S1418), and this process ends.

If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is not "0" in step S1401 (NO in S1401), that is, if there is one or more stored random number counter values (reserved information for special symbol 2) obtained as a result of winning at the second starting port 12, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403), which will be described later. The game control microcomputer 101 then decrements the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by 1 (S1404). The storage location (memory area) for various counter values in the special symbol 2 reservation memory unit 105b is then shifted one position toward the read side from the current position, and the memory area corresponding to the first reserved ball in the special symbol 2 reservation memory unit 105b is cleared (S1405). The game control microcomputer 101 then executes the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1406) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, thereby starting the display of the variation of the second special symbol. The variation start command (also called the special symbol 2 variation start command) set in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1406) includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and information on the variation pattern set in the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including variation time information).

Also, if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), i.e., there is no reserved information for Special Chart 2 but there is one or more stored random number counter values (reserved information for Special Chart 1) obtained as a result of winning at the first starting hole 11, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the Special Chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the Special Chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409), which will be described later. The game control microcomputer 101 then decrements the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 by 1 (S1410). The storage location (memory area) for various counter values in the Special Chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a is then shifted one position toward the side from which the balls are read, and the memory area corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in the Special Chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a (the memory area farthest from the side from which the balls are read) is cleared (S1411). In this way, the reserved balls for Special Chart 1 are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1412) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, thereby starting the display of the first special symbol variation. The variation start command (also referred to as the special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1412) includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including variation time information).

When the process proceeds to step S1413, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clear process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and the process ends. The customer waiting counter is stored in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state has continued. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned back on, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Waiting for Customers Measurement Processing] As shown in FIG. 37, the waiting for customers measurement processing (S1419) first executes a waiting for customer counter increment processing (S1420), which increments the value of the waiting for customer counter. This allows the game control microcomputer 101 to determine the length of time the waiting for customers state has continued based on the value of the waiting for customer counter. Next, it determines whether the waiting for customers state has continued for one hour or more. If it determines that it has not continued (NO in S1421), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it determines that it has continued (YES in S1421), it executes a non-deletion clear processing (S1422), similar to the processing in step S202 described above (see FIG. 33). This clears the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls memory unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls memory unit 107b, and the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the difference in the number of balls memory unit 107c.

Next, the non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this process ends. When the non-erase clear command is sent to the performance control board 120, the difference ball count reset notification image CLS is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 30 (B).

[Special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (special symbol 1 jackpot determination process)] The special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figure 38. As shown in Figure 38, in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) or the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), first, a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) is read as a determination value (S1501). In detail, in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the special symbol random number stored in the first memory area of the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reserves) is read. Additionally, in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the special symbol random number stored in the first memory area (i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first reserved special symbol) of the special symbol 1 reserved memory unit 105a of the gaming RAM 104 is read.

Next, the jackpot determination table (Fig. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON, i.e., whether the state is high probability (S1503). If the state is not high probability (NO in S1503), i.e., if the state is normal probability (non-high probability state), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "1000" to "1219") in the jackpot determination table (Fig. 12(A)) (S1504). On the other hand, if the state is high probability (YES in S1503), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "1000" to "2499") in the jackpot determination table (Fig. 12(A)) (S1505).

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is a "jackpot," a jackpot symbol type random number is read and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12 (B) (S1506). After the jackpot type is determined (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in gaming RAM 104 (S1508), and processing ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is a "miss," special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the miss symbol is set (S1508), and processing ends.

[Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process)] The Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1403) and the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figures 39 and 40. As shown in Figure 39, the Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1403) or the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1409) first determines whether the game state is in the time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not) (S1601).

If the game is not in the time-saving mode (NO in S1601), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving mode, it is next determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1602). If it is ON (YES in S1602), the game refers to the normal jackpot table for non-time-saving mode (the portion of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14 that corresponds to the non-time-saving mode and jackpot), and selects a special chart variation pattern based on the special chart variation pattern random number (S1603).

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is not ON, it is determined whether the reach random number is a reach-established random number value (S1604). As shown in Figure 12 (C), the reach-established random number value is "0" to "29" in the non-time-saving state, and "0" to "9" in the time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, it is less likely that a reach will occur when a miss occurs than in the non-time-saving state. This is because by selecting more misses without a reach and a short variable time in the time-saving state, the speed at which the reserved special chart is consumed is increased.

If the reach random number is a reach-established random number value (YES in S1604), that is, if there is a reach but a miss, the reach but a miss table during non-time-saving state (the portion of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 or 14 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and reach but a miss) is referenced, and a special chart change pattern is selected based on the special chart change pattern random number (S1605).

On the other hand, if the reach random number is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1604), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the non-time-saving state no-reach miss table (the portion of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 or 14 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and no-reach miss) is referenced, and a special symbol change pattern is selected based on the special symbol change pattern random number (S1606). In this no-reach miss, a shortened change function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is "3" or "4," a special symbol change pattern with a shorter special symbol change time is selected compared to when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is "0" to "2" (see Figure 13 or 14).

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1601 that the game state is in the time-saving state (YES in S1601), as shown in FIG. 40, processing (S1607 to S1611) is performed in the same manner as steps S1602 to S1606 above, except that the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table to be referenced is the table for the time-saving state (the portion of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14 that corresponds to the time-saving state).

In other words, if it is a jackpot, the part of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 in the time-saving state that corresponds to a jackpot is referenced, and a special chart variation pattern is selected based on the special chart variation pattern random number (S1608). Also, if it is a miss with reach, the part of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 in the time-saving state that corresponds to a miss with reach is referenced, and a special chart variation pattern is selected based on the special chart variation pattern random number (S1610). Also, if it is a miss without reach, the part of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 in the time-saving state that corresponds to a miss without reach is referenced, and a special chart variation pattern is selected based on the special chart variation pattern random number (S1611).

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern as described above, the selected special symbol variation pattern is set (S1612) as shown in Figure 39, and this process ends. Information about the special symbol variation pattern set in step S1612 is included in the variation start command set in step S1406 or S1412 in the special symbol standby process (S1302), and is sent to the performance control board 120 by output processing (S112).

[Special symbol fluctuation processing] As shown in Figure 41, the special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time (special symbol fluctuation time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409; see Figure 13 or 14) has elapsed (S1801). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1801), this processing immediately ends. This allows the special symbol fluctuation display to continue.

On the other hand, if the special symbol change time has elapsed (YES in S1801), a change stop command is set (S1802) and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1803). Then, other processing is performed, such as stopping the special symbol change display at the symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1804), and this processing ends.

[Special Symbol Determination Process] As shown in Figure 42, the special symbol determination process (S1306) first determines whether the special symbol stop time (the stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed (S1901). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process immediately ends. This allows the special symbol to continue to be displayed as a stopped symbol. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the game status management process described below is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern (see FIG. 16 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter, which counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game, is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data corresponding to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

Following step S1904, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variable flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if the time-saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, while the jackpot game is being played, the game is controlled to a normal probability state and a non-time-saving state. After that, to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). The special operation status is then set to "4" (S1908), and this process ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game will not start, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909) and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 43, the game status management processing (S1902) first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variable counter, which counts the number of times the special symbol has changed during the high probability state, is decremented by 1 (S2002), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter is "0" (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability variable flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time-saving state, is decremented by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S2008), and the process proceeds to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), proceed to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010) and proceed to step S2011. In this way, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high-probability high base state or low-probability low base state has ended, the game becomes unplayable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is sent to the performance control board 120, a red background image RE and an error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 27 (A). In addition, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off.

In step S2012, a game state designation command containing information on the current game state (information on whether the probability variable flag and time-saving flag are ON or OFF), the probability variable counter value, and the time-saving counter value is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and this process ends.

[Special Electric Device Processing (Jackpot Game)] Special electric device processing is processing for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 44, the special electric device processing (S1307) first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2701). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that all of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 14D, second jackpot device 15D) have been opened during the jackpot game currently being played.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2701), it is determined whether the large prize opening (first large prize opening, second large prize opening 15) is currently open (i.e., whether the first large prize device 14D or the second large prize device 15D is currently open) (S2702). If it is not currently open (NO in S2702), it is determined whether the time has come to open the large prize opening, i.e., whether the jackpot opening time has passed and it is time to start opening the first large prize opening 14, or whether the interval time between openings has passed and it is time to start the next opening (S2703).

If the determination result in step S2703 is NO, processing ends as is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2703 is YES, it is determined whether the currently executing jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a V-long jackpot (see FIG. 16) (S2704). If it is not a V-long jackpot (NO in S2704), proceed to step S2707. However, if it is a V-long jackpot (YES in S2704), it is determined whether it is time to start the 10th round, which allows passage to the specific area 16 (S2705). If it is not time to start the 10th round (NO in S2705), proceed directly to step S2707. On the other hand, if it is time to start the 10th round (YES in S2705), V valid period setting processing is performed (S2706).

In the V valid period setting process (S2706), the period during which the second large winning opening 15 is open and the few seconds after the second large winning opening 15 is closed in the 10th round of a V long jackpot are set as the V valid period during which detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be valid. Note that in this embodiment, periods other than this (including when a jackpot game is not being played) are set as the V invalid period during which detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, determining that detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if a gaming ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2707, the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) are opened according to an opening pattern (see Figure 16) corresponding to the type of jackpot. The distribution member 16k always moves in a constant manner from the start of the first round of play. In the opening pattern for a V-long jackpot, the AT opening/closing member 14k is opened in the 10th round so that a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with ease. In contrast, in the opening pattern for a V-short jackpot, the opening timing of the AT opening/closing member 14k relative to the operation of the distribution member 16k is set so that a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 cannot pass through the specific area 16 in the 10th round.

Next, in step S2708, a round designation command transmission determination process is performed, and this process ends. The round designation command transmission determination process (S2708) determines whether the opening of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) in step S2703 was the first opening in a single round of play, and if so, a round designation command containing information on the number of rounds in the ongoing large prize game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Note that in this embodiment, the large prize openings are not opened multiple times during a single round of play. Therefore, a round designation command is always set in this step S2708.

In step S2702 of the special electric device processing (S1307), if the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) are open, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the large prize openings are met (S2709). In this embodiment, the closing conditions are met when either the number of prizes won by the large prize openings in that round of play reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (10 prizes per round in this embodiment), or the time for closing the large prize openings has arrived (i.e., the specified opening time (see Figure 16) has elapsed since the large prize openings were opened). If the conditions for closing the large prize openings are not met (NO in S2709), processing ends.

On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the major prize openings (first major prize opening 14, second major prize opening 15) are met (YES in S2709), the major prize openings are closed (blocked) (S2710). Then, it is determined whether one round of play (round interval) has ended (S2711). If it has not ended (NO in S2711), processing ends. On the other hand, if the round of play has ended (YES in S2711), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2712), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2713). If it is not "0" (NO in S2713), processing ends as is to start the next round of play.

On the other hand, if the value is "0" (YES in S2713), the jackpot ending command is set (S2714) and the jackpot ending is started (S2715) as part of the jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot ending flag is set (S2716) and processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2701 (YES in S2701), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the ending time for the jackpot game has elapsed (S2717). If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2717), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2717), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2718). Then, the game status setting processing described below is performed (S2719). Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2720). Next, the special action status is set to "1" (S2721), and this processing ends.

[Game Status Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 45, the game status setting process (S2719) first determines whether the V flag is ON (whether a V win occurred during the V valid period) (S2801). If it is ON (YES in S2801), the probability variable flag is turned ON (S2802) and the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2803). This results in control of the high probability, high base state after the jackpot game. Next, the probability variable counter is set to "160" (S2804), and the time-saving counter is set to "160" (S2805), and the process proceeds to step S2808. This results in control of the high probability, high base state, where the number of STs is 160 and the number of time-savings is 160.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the V flag is not ON (NO in S2801), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2806). In other words, the probability-changing flag is not turned ON in this case. As a result, the game will be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state after a jackpot. Next, the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S2807), and the program proceeds to step S2808. In other words, the game will be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state with 100 time-saving cycles.

In step S2808, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state designation command containing information about the currently set game state (ON or OFF of the special rate flag, ON or OFF of the time-saving flag, the value of the special rate counter, and the value of the time-saving counter) in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. This completes the game state setting process (S2719).

[Output Processing] As shown in Figure 46, the output processing (S112) executes the outer edge signal output processing described below (S3001). Next, as other output processing (S3002), the commands and the like set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processes are output to the performance control board 120 and payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer end signal output processing] As shown in Figure 47, the outer end signal output processing (S3001) determines whether the over-prize ball notification flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it determines whether the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), proceed to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notification flag is ON (YES in S3101), execute the outer end signal output processing for over-prize ball notification (S3102) and proceed to step S3102. In the outer end signal output processing for over-prize ball notification (S3102), an outer end signal indicating that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "outer end signal for over-prize ball notification") is sent from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 transmits an outer end signal for warning of excess balls via parallel communication to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.). As a result, when the number of remaining balls in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 increases slightly (within 10,000), the arcade staff member monitoring the hall computer can be made aware of a situation in which the excess ball prevention function may be activated.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), proceed to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the process executes the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls (S3104) and proceeds to step S3105. In the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls (S3104), an outer end signal indicating that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "outer end signal for over-prize balls") is sent from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 sends the outer end signal for over-prize ball notification to the external unit GU via parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an arcade employee monitoring the hall computer to understand that the difference in ball count on this pachinko gaming machine PY1 has reached 80,000, and that play will become impossible once the high-probability, high-base state or low-probability, low-base state ends.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), proceed to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), the game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106) and proceed to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), an outer end signal indicating that the game has become playable due to the activation of the excess prize ball prevention function (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") is sent from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 sends the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU via parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the arcade staff monitoring the hall computer to be aware of situations in which play has become impossible due to the activation of the excess prize ball prevention function on this pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-deletion clearing process shown in step S203 or the non-deletion clearing process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, it is determined whether the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball count memory unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls memory unit 107b, and the information on the difference in number of balls stored in the difference in number of balls memory unit 107c have been cleared. If the non-deletion clearing process has not been executed (NO in S3107), proceed to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-deletion clearing process has been executed (YES in S3107), a reset outer edge signal output process is executed (S3108), and proceed to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the difference in number of balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as the "reset outer edge signal") is sent from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. This causes the external terminal board 160 to transmit a reset outer edge signal to the external unit GU via parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the gaming parlor employee monitoring the hall computer to understand that the difference in the number of balls has been reset in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and via this dedicated signal line, the over-prize ball notification outer edge signal, over-prize ball outer edge signal, game stop outer edge signal, and reset outer edge signal are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

8. Operation of the performance control microcomputer Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 50. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[Sub-control main processing] When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 121 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in Figure 48 from the effect ROM 123. As shown in the figure, the sub-control main processing first performs power-on processing in response to power-on (S4001). The power-on processing includes, for example, setting the effect CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update processing (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters used to make judgments regarding various effects are updated. As an example, the method for updating the effect determination random number counters for various effects can be the same as the random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be incremented by 2 rather than by 1. This is also true for the random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above.

Once the random number update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process (S4004), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 140 displays an image on the display screen 50a in accordance with the received command (performing various image-based performances). In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the performance control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (performing various audio-based sound performances), illuminates the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 via the lamp control circuit 151 (performing various light-emitting performances through illumination), and operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 (performing various movable object performances through movement). In this way, various effects (variation effects, hold effects, movable object effects, operation effects, pre-reading effects, other preview effects, opening effects associated with special games, open game effects, ending effects, customer waiting effects, control of effect modes, etc.) are realized.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then enables interrupts (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed.

The receive interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a command sent from the main control board 100 is input to the performance control microcomputer 121. In the receive interrupt process (S4010), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the various commands sent and received by the output process (S112) of the main control board 100 in the receive buffer of the performance RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing] The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 ms period is input to the performance control board 120. As shown in Figure 49, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) sequentially performs input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104).

The input process (S4101) detects operations on player-operable operating elements such as the normal button detection switch 40a, special button detection switch 41a, and select button detection switch, and sets commands and creates performance data based on the detection results. The light emission data output process (S4102) references light emission data (lamp data) to illuminate lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 at timings that match image effects, etc., based on the performance data created in the input process (S4101) and the performance data creation process (S4204) described below. The lamp control circuit 151 is then controlled based on the light emission data. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 illuminates the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. in a predetermined lighting mode in accordance with the light emission data. In the movable body control process (S4103), drive data is referenced to perform movable body effects that operate movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at predetermined timings based on performance data created in the input process (S4101) and the performance data creation process (S4204) described below. The lamp control circuit 151 is then controlled based on the drive data. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 operates movable devices 55, 56, and 58 in a predetermined operating mode in accordance with the drive data. In the watchdog timer process (S4104), the watchdog timer is reset.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time a 10 ms periodic interrupt pulse is input to the performance control board 120. As shown in Figure 50, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) sequentially performs received command analysis processing (S4201), performance timer update processing (S4202), audio control processing (S4203), and performance data creation processing (S4204).

The received command analysis process (S4201) analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the effect RAM 124 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) and performs processing according to the command (for example, selecting an effect, setting an effect mode, setting a command, etc.). The effect timer update process (S4202) updates the timer used to measure the time related to each effect. For example, the effect timer update process (S4202) measures the start and end timing of the effective operation period of operation units such as the normal button 40 and special button 41. The audio control process (S4203) creates audio data (data that controls the audio output from the speaker 52) and controls the audio control circuit 161 based on the results of the input process (S4101) and the received command analysis process (S4201). The effect data creation process (S4204) creates data for effect based on the results of the received command analysis process (S4201).

Here, an example of the processing when the presentation control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the presentation control microcomputer 121 is a fluctuation start command (special chart 1 fluctuation start command or special chart 2 fluctuation start command). If the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines in the received command analysis process (S4201) that it has received a fluctuation start command, it performs the processing upon receiving the fluctuation start command by selecting a fluctuation presentation pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) based on the special chart fluctuation pattern indicated by the command, setting information for that sub-fluctuation pattern, and setting a fluctuation presentation start command including information for that sub-fluctuation pattern in the output buffer. For example, if the special chart fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is an SP fluctuation (a fluctuation pattern associated with an SP reach), it selects a sub-fluctuation pattern that performs an SP reach, and sets a fluctuation presentation start command corresponding to that sub-fluctuation pattern in the output buffer. After that, various processes (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), sound control process (S4203), etc.) are executed, thereby realizing a variation effect corresponding to the selected sub-variation pattern. Note that the processing flow for realizing such effects is basically the same for other effects such as effects associated with special games, customer waiting effects, pre-reading effects, so-called advance notice effects associated with the relevant variation, and control of the effect mode.

9. Operation Caution Display Next, the operation caution display will be explained. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated or when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the game becomes unplayable. In other words, the game control process and the launch control process are stopped. At this time, even though the game is unplayable, the player may not accurately grasp the situation and continue to rotate the handle 72k (launch operation means). Therefore, in this embodiment, after the game becomes unplayable, an operation caution display is executed based on the player's rotation of the handle 72k, warning the player not to stop launching game balls. This operation caution display can prevent the player from wasting balls.

Figure 51 shows a case where an operation warning effect (warning effect) is executed after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. First, as a prerequisite, assume that the player has not performed any rotation operation on the handle 72k and that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 recognizes that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated by receiving a game stop notification command (see S2011) from the game control microcomputer 101. Then, as shown in Figure 51 (A), the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error release method image ERX on the display screen 50a and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 are lit in white and all board lamps 54 are turned off.

When the player then rotates the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see Figure 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes an operation caution effect while the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 51 (B). That is, the operation caution image HT, which reads "Do not rotate the handle," is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a sound saying "Do not rotate the handle," and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit in red. This operation caution effect makes the player even more aware that it is not the time to launch the game ball.

After that, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops receiving detection signals from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see Figure 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation caution effect, as shown in Figure 51 (C). In this way, in this embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the operation caution effect is executed only while the player is rotating the handle 72k.

Figure 52 shows a case where an operation warning effect (warning effect) is executed after an illegal magnetism is detected. First, assume that the player has not performed any rotation operation on the handle 72k and an illegal magnetism has been detected. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a magnetic detection command from the game control microcomputer 101 indicating that an illegal magnetism has been detected. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error release method image ER1 on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 52 (A), and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 are lit in white and all board lamps 54 are turned off.

When the player then rotates the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see Figure 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes an operation caution effect while the red background image RE and error release method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 52 (B). That is, the operation caution image HT, which reads "Do not rotate the handle," is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a sound saying "Do not rotate the handle," and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 are all lit in red. This operation caution effect makes the player even more aware that it is not the time to launch the game ball.

After that, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops receiving detection signals from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see Figure 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation caution effect, as shown in Figure 52 (C). In this way, in this embodiment, the operation caution effect is executed only while the player is rotating the handle 72k after an illegal magnetism has been detected.

10. Effects of the Present Embodiment As explained above, with the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of a jackpot game state or in the middle of a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state, and there is no particular disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine PY1 that allows the player to stop playing at a time when it is easy to stop playing, without awarding excessive prize balls.

Furthermore, with this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1, if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) ends, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop playing before the balls in their possession begin to decrease after the high base state ends. In other words, after transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state, it is possible for the total number of balls fired to increase, and a situation can be imagined in which the difference in the number of balls falls below 80,000. Therefore, to prevent the above situation from occurring, it is possible to stop playing when the high base state ends.

However, if a player stops playing before the difference in balls reaches 80,000, and a later player starts playing and the difference in balls exceeds 80,000 immediately, a terrible situation can occur. Therefore, with this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1, the measured difference in balls is reset based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. Specifically, the difference in balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, or when the waiting state continues for one hour. This prevents later players from having to stop playing immediately after starting, preventing terrible situations from occurring.

Furthermore, with this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1, when an employee of the gaming parlor presses the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, the number of reserved special symbols, and the results of determining whether a jackpot has been won) is erased, but the information on the difference in ball numbers stored in the difference in ball number memory unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even in situations during business hours when gaming information must be erased due to a malfunction or the like, it is possible to prevent the measured difference in ball numbers from being erased.

Furthermore, with this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, as described above, the measured difference in the number of balls is not erased even when RAM is cleared. However, the measured difference in the number of balls can be erased by an amusement parlor employee pressing the special reset switch 181. In this way, the amusement parlor employee can erase the measured difference in the number of balls at any time.

Furthermore, with this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, a game stop warning image KH is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in Figure 28 (B), warning that the game will become impossible to play. This allows the player to know in advance that the game will become impossible to play, preventing confusion when the game is suddenly impossible to play. In particular, the game stop warning image KH, as shown in Figure 28 (B), indicates that the game will become impossible to play when the high base state ends. This makes it possible for the player to accurately know when the game will be played.

Furthermore, with this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, as described above, if the difference in the number of balls exceeds 80,000, the game becomes unplayable. If the player were to rotate the handle 72k at this time, the launch control process (S109) would be stopped, and no game balls would be launched, but an operational caution display would be executed, as shown in Figure 51 (B). That is, the operational caution image HT would be displayed on the display screen 50a, a voice message saying "Do not turn the handle" would be output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 would all light up in red. This would more reliably let the player know that the game was unplayable.

Furthermore, with this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, as described above, if unauthorized magnetism is detected, the game becomes unplayable. If the player were to rotate the handle 72k at this time, the launch control process (S109) would be stopped, and no game balls would be launched, but an operational caution display would be executed, as shown in Figure 52 (B). That is, the operational caution image HT would be displayed on the display screen 50a, a voice message saying "Do not turn the handle" would be output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 would all be lit in red. This would more reliably let the player know that the game was unplayable.

11. Modified Examples Modified examples will be described below. In the description of the modified examples, the same components as those in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modified examples may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in the above embodiment and the modified examples below may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<First Modification>
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is configured as a type 1 gaming machine in which a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol. In contrast, the first modified example is configured as a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine. That is, when a small jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, a small jackpot game is executed in which the large prize opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds. In this case, when a game ball that enters the large prize opening by executing the small jackpot game passes through a specific area within the large prize opening, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. Thus, the first modified example is configured as a type 1/type 2 hybrid machine in which a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when the game ball passes through a specific area within the large prize opening.

In addition, in the first variant, if a small prize is won in the special drawing for special chart 2, as long as the player is playing correctly, a Type 2 jackpot game will essentially always be executed (the game ball will be able to pass through a specific area). In other words, winning a small prize in the special drawing for special chart 2 means that a jackpot game will be executed. Here, as shown in Figure 53, when transitioning from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal play state, the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 is four (a predetermined number). The drawing for special chart 2 is executed with priority over the drawing for special chart 1 and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the drawing for special chart 1. In this case, when transitioning from the high base state to the normal play state, four drawings for special chart 2 will be executed, which still makes it easier for the player to execute a jackpot game. Therefore, even after transitioning to the normal play state, until the drawing for special chart 2 is no longer executed, it can be said that there is an advantageous period (advantageous play state) in which the player is more likely to execute a jackpot game.

In this first variant, let's assume that the excess prize ball prevention function is activated when the game transitions to normal game mode, as described above. In this case, even though the player is still in a situation (advantageous period) in which it is easy to execute a jackpot game even in normal game mode, they will suddenly be unable to play. Therefore, in this first variant, as shown in Figure 53, the excess prize ball prevention function does not activate when the game transitions to normal game mode, but the excess prize ball prevention function activates when all remaining special symbol 2 reserves (remaining special symbol 2 reserves) are consumed when the game transitions to normal game mode. In other words, when all remaining special symbol 2 reserves are consumed (when all variable and stopped displays of the second special symbol based on the remaining special symbol 2 reserves have ended), the game is rendered unplayable.

In this way, even if the game transitions to normal play mode after the difference in ball count reaches 80,000 or more, the player can continue playing until the advantageous period (advantageous play mode) in which it is easier to win a Type 2 jackpot game ends. In the first variant, the drawing for special chart 2 is executed before the drawing for special chart 1, but it is also possible to have the drawing for special chart 1 executed before the drawing for special chart 2, or to have the drawing for special chart 1 or the drawing for special chart 2 executed in the order in which the game balls enter the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12.

Next, we will explain the effects that occur after transitioning from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal game state in the first variant. If there are remaining reserves for special symbol 2 when transitioning to the normal game state, the remaining reserve special effect shown in Figure 54 will be executed until all remaining reserves for special symbol 2 are consumed. This remaining reserve special effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a small jackpot has been won in the drawing for special symbol 2, and is an effect that is never executed in the high base state, and is never executed in the drawing for special symbol 1. In other words, the remaining reserve special effect (advantageous effect) is a special effect that indicates a chance of winning a Type 2 jackpot game only after transitioning to the normal game state until all remaining reserves for special symbol 2 are consumed (until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed four times).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 54(A), when transitioning from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal game state, a remaining chance count image LA indicating "4 chances left" is displayed on the display screen 50a. This makes the player aware that he or she still has four chances to win a Type 2 jackpot. Then, as shown in Figure 54(A), the display screen 50a displays a main character appearance image BA1 in which a transformed main character appears, with a reach pattern formed by the left effect pattern EZ1 indicating "5" and the right effect pattern EZ3 indicating "5." In addition, a remaining change count image LB indicating "4 chances left" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 50a, indicating how many times the second special symbol change display will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (C), a special battle image BA2 is displayed, showing the transformed protagonist fighting against an enemy character. If a small win or a big win is won in the special drawing for Special Chart 2, a special battle victory image WI is displayed, showing the transformed protagonist defeating the enemy character, as shown in Figure 54 (D-1). At this time, the small effect symbol KZ, which had been displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the display screen 50a, stops and displays the winning pattern "555," which is a double-digit number. In this way, a player who sees the special battle victory image WI and the double-digit small effect symbol KZ can understand that they have won a small win or a big win. If a small win has been won, a Type 2 big win game can be won by passing the game ball through a specific area during the small win game. If a big win has been won, a Type 1 big win game can be won.

On the other hand, if the Special Chart 2 lottery results in a loss, a special battle defeat image LO is displayed, indicating that the transformed protagonist character has been defeated by the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 54 (D-2). At this time, the small effect symbol KZ, which had been displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the display screen 50a, stops at "545," a close-to-miss number. In this way, a player who sees the special battle victory image WI and the close-to-miss small effect symbol KZ can understand that they have lost. Thus, if the Special Chart 2 lottery results in a loss, the remaining reserve special effect shown in FIG. 54 is repeatedly executed until all remaining reserves for Special Chart 2 are consumed. If all the results of the Special Chart 2 lottery results in a loss, the advantageous period (advantageous game state) ends. After that, in the normal game state, the remaining reserve special effect is not executed, and a variable effect based on the Special Chart 1 lottery is executed.

In this first variant, if the difference in ball count is less than 80,000, the remaining reserve special effect shown in FIG. 54 is executed during the advantageous period (advantageous game state) from when the game transitions to the normal game state until all of the remaining reserves on special chart 2 are consumed. On the other hand, even if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the remaining reserve special effect shown in FIG. 54 is executed during the advantageous period from when the game transitions to the normal game state until all of the remaining reserves on special chart 2 are consumed (see FIG. 53). In this way, after the transition to the normal game state, as long as the remaining reserve special effect, which indicates an advantageous situation for the player, continues, the excessive prize ball prevention function will not be activated. Therefore, even if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the remaining reserve special effect after the transition to the normal game state. In other words, even if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the game transitions to the normal game state, the remaining reserve special effect before the game became unplayable is executed as is, making it possible to synchronize the timing when the game becomes unplayable and the timing when the remaining reserve special effect ends.

<Second Modification>
In the above embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, an accompanying effect is executed, for example, by displaying a red-bordered image EFb or a game stop warning image KH (see FIG. 28(B)). However, even when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the effect itself is not replaced and executed. In contrast, in the second modified example, when the difference in the number of balls changes from a situation where the difference is less than 80,000 to a situation where the difference is 80,000 or more, the effect itself is replaced and executed. In this second modified example, like the first modified example, it is configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine. The effect of the second modified example will be explained using as an example a case where the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 53.

As a prerequisite, a jackpot game is being played when the difference in the number of balls is less than 80,000. At this time, as shown in Figure 55 (A), a round effect is being played on the display screen 50a. That is, the display screen 50a displays a round image G109, a prize ball count image G110, and a round background image G114. Here, as shown in Figure 53, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of a jackpot game. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 sends an excess prize ball notification command (see step S312) to the effect control microcomputer 121, and the effect control microcomputer 121 recognizes that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000 or more. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the round substitution effect shown in Figure 55 (B).

Specifically, in the round substitution presentation, as shown in Figure 55 (B), the round background image G114, which depicts a city, is switched to a round substitution background image G116, which depicts a dark Western-style mansion. Then, superimposed on the round substitution background image G116, a round image G109 and a prize ball count image G110 are displayed, along with a game stop notice image KI indicating that "game will be stopped when the advantageous period ends." Furthermore, a warning display image G115, displaying a police lamp and the word "DANGER," is displayed at the forefront of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention.

In this way, when the difference in ball count reaches 80,000 or more, a round substitution effect is executed, which significantly changes the presentation style from the round effect, making the player more aware of the situation in which they are no longer able to play. In other words, for players who do not fully understand the excess prize ball prevention function, even if the round effect is accompanied by the red-bordered image EFb or the game stop warning image KH (see Figure 28 (B)), they may mistake it for a simple presentation and fail to fully understand the situation in which they are no longer able to play. Therefore, in the second variant, by executing the round substitution effect shown in Figure 55 (B) instead of the round effect, it is possible to make the player more aware that the situation has changed significantly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53, when the game transitions from the jackpot game state to the high base state (time-saving state), the time-saving mode alternative effect shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the time-saving mode alternative effect, as shown in FIG. 55(C), a time-saving alternative background image G117 depicting dark clouds and thunder is displayed. Then, the effect symbol EZ and a game stop warning image KI are displayed superimposed on the time-saving alternative background image G117. Furthermore, a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" is displayed at the forefront of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention.

In this way, even in a high base state (time-saving state) when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the time-saving mode presentation shown in FIG. 18 (B-5) is not executed, and the time-saving mode alternative presentation shown in FIG. 55 (C) is executed. This makes it possible to make the player more aware of situations in which they are no longer able to play. In other words, it is possible to make players who do not fully understand the excessive prize ball prevention function more aware that, although they are in a situation where they could easily win a Type 2 jackpot game, they are in a situation where they will have to stop playing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53, the game transitions from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal game state, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 at the time of the transition to the normal game state is assumed to be "4." In this case, the remaining reserve substitution special effect shown in FIG. 56 is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the remaining reserve substitution special effect (special effect), as shown in FIG. 56(A), when the game transitions from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal game state, a remaining number of times to stop play image LH1 indicating "four times left until game is stopped" is first displayed on the display screen 50a. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of times the special symbol will change before play can no longer be carried out. Note that the number indicated by the remaining number of times to stop play image LH1 varies from "4" to "1" depending on the remaining number of reserved balls for special symbol 2. In this way, the second modified example can provide the player with a novel effect that notifies the player of the remaining number of times the special symbol will change before game play is stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (B), the display screen 50a displays the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 in a changing manner, and an explanatory image SM indicating "If Vs line up, it's a jackpot?" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This explanatory image SM allows the player to understand that if "Vs" line up on the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2, a jackpot game will be executed. Additionally, at the top of the display screen 50a, a remaining number of times to stop play image LN1 indicating "four times remaining until game is stopped" is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the remaining number of times the special symbol will change before game is stopped, even while the special symbol (second special symbol) is being displayed in a changing manner. The number of times indicated by the remaining number of times to stop play image LN1 varies from "4" to "1" depending on the number of remaining reserved special symbol 2. The display of this remaining number of times to stop play image LN1 corresponds to a "game not possible notice effect."

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (C), on the display screen 50a, the special effect symbol TZ1 on the left side stops at "V," while the special effect symbol TZ2 on the right side continues to change. If a small win or a big win is subsequently won in the special drawing for Special Chart 2, the special effect symbol TZ2 on the right side stops at "V," completing the "V" pattern, as shown in Figure 56 (D-1). At this time, the small effect symbol KZ, which had been changing, stops at "555," a winning pattern with a double number, in the upper left corner of the display screen 50a. In this way, a player who sees the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2, which display "VV," and the double-number small effect symbol KZ can understand that they have won a small win or a big win. If a small win is subsequently won, a player can win a Type 2 big win by passing the game ball through a specific area during the small win game. Additionally, if you win a jackpot, you can win a Type 1 jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the Special Chart 2 lottery results in a loss, as shown in Figure 56 (D-2), the special effect symbol TZ2 on the right side will stop at "1," meaning the "V" will not be aligned. At this time, the small effect symbol KZ, which was displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the display screen 50a, will stop at "545," which is a close miss. In this way, players who see the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 indicating "V1" and the close miss small effect symbol KZ can understand that they have lost. Furthermore, a remaining count image NC, indicating "three chances remaining," is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. This allows players to understand that they are approaching the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function (game termination). After that, the remaining reserve replacement special effect shown in Figure 56 is repeatedly executed in the Special Chart 2 remaining reserve. If all the results of the lottery for Special Design 2 are losses, the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated when the advantageous period (advantageous game state) ends (when the stop time for the second special design has elapsed), and the game will be disabled.

As mentioned above, when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, a remaining reserve substitution special effect with a significantly different presentation format is executed instead of the remaining reserve special effect, making it possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which they are unable to play. In other words, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the remaining reserve special effect shown in Figure 54 is executed after transitioning from the high base state (time-saving state) to the normal play state, the player may mistakenly believe that the excess prize ball prevention function has not yet been activated. In other words, with the remaining reserve special effect, even if all the reserved balls in Special Chart 2 are consumed and the advantageous period has ended, the player is likely to be given the impression that they can still continue playing by transitioning to the normal play state. Therefore, in the second variant, by executing the remaining reserve substitution special effect shown in Figure 56 instead of the remaining reserve special effect, it is possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which they are unable to play due to the activation of the excess prize ball prevention function if they do not win a Type 2 jackpot game.

<Third Modification>
In the above embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the game transitions from a high base state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) to a normal game state (see FIG. 25), the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In contrast, in the third modified embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times (a specified number of times) after the game transitions from the high base state to the normal game state (when a specified condition is met), the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this third modified embodiment, like the above embodiment, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine.

In the third variant, as shown in Figure 57, after transitioning from the high probability high base state to the normal game state, the mode is set to the normal post-transition only mode until the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 30. Similarly, after transitioning from the low probability high base state to the normal game state, the mode is set to the normal post-transition only mode until the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 30. In other words, even when transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state, the mode is not set to the normal presentation mode for a while, but is set to the normal post-transition only mode. Then, when the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 30 since transitioning to the normal game state, the mode is set to the normal presentation mode.

Next, we will explain the effects in the post-normal transition dedicated mode in the first variant. Note that in the post-normal transition dedicated mode, the same effects are executed regardless of whether there is a special symbol 2 remaining in reserve when transitioning to normal game mode and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or whether there is no special symbol 2 remaining in reserve when transitioning to normal game mode and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, when the game transitions to the post-normal transition-only mode, a mode transition image MT indicating "Entering post-normal transition-only mode" is first displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 58(A). This allows the player to believe that the high base state has ended but that the game has transitioned to a special presentation mode. Then, as shown in Figure 58(B), the display screen 50a displays a special background image G121 depicting the surface of a special planet, while the presentation symbol EZ changes. If the special symbol lottery results in a loss, the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop at the losing "8" pattern, as shown in Figure 58(C). This type of presentation, in which the presentation symbol EZ changes and then stops while the special background image G121 is displayed, is referred to as a "post-normal transition-only presentation." As a result, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, as long as the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the special effect (special effect) will be executed until the special symbol variable display has been executed 30 times. In this way, after the transition to the normal game state, the player is shown a novel special effect after the transition to the normal game state, rather than the familiar normal mode effect (see Figures 18 (B-1) (B-2) (B-3)). As a result, it is possible to create the impression that the advantageous situation may still continue.

In this third variant, if the difference in ball count is less than 80,000, the dedicated post-normal transition effect shown in FIG. 58 is executed from the transition to the normal game state until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times. On the other hand, even if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the dedicated post-normal transition effect shown in FIG. 58 is executed from the transition to the normal game state until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times (see FIG. 57). In this way, the excessive prize ball prevention function will not be activated as long as the dedicated post-normal transition effect continues after the transition to the normal game state. Therefore, even if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, it is possible for the player to enjoy the novel dedicated post-normal transition effect after the transition to the normal game state. Then, when the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times after the transition to the normal game state, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated simultaneously with the end of the dedicated post-normal transition effect. In this way, it is possible to synchronize the timing when game play becomes impossible and the timing when the dedicated post-normal transition effect ends.

<Fourth Modification>
In the third modified example, even if the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the post-normal transition dedicated effect shown in FIG. 58 is executed until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times after transition to the normal game state. In contrast, in the fourth modified example, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the post-normal transition alternative effect shown in FIG. 59 is executed instead of the post-normal transition dedicated effect until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times after transition to the normal game state. This fourth modified example, like the third modified example, is configured as a type 1 gaming machine. The effects of the fourth modified example will be explained using an example in which the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 57.

When the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the game transitions from the high-probability, high-base state to the normal game state, first, as shown in Figure 59 (A), the remaining number of times to stop game play image LH2 indicating "30 times left until game is stopped" is displayed on the display screen 50a. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of times the special symbol will change before game play can no longer be carried out. In this way, in the fourth variant, when the game transitions to the normal game state, it is possible to provide the player with a novel presentation in which the remaining number of times the special symbol will change before game play is stopped is notified.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (B), the display screen 50a displays a light ray background image G122 representing flowing light rays, while the effect symbol EZ is displayed in a changing manner. Also, a miniature character image MN1 representing a miniature character is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, a remaining number of times to stop play image LN2 indicating "30 times remaining until game is stopped" is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the remaining number of times the special symbol will change before game is stopped, even while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. The number displayed in the remaining number of times to stop play image LN2 is counted down from "30" to "1" each time the special symbol is displayed in a changing manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (C), a character appearance image TN1 representing a grown-up character is displayed on the display screen 50a. Thus, in the post-normal transition alternative presentation, the characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are introduced one after another by displaying the mini character image MN1 and the character appearance image TN1 each time a special symbol variable display is executed. By executing such a character introduction presentation, it is possible to make the player feel as if the presentation is like an ending leading up to the game being stopped. In other words, by introducing the characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 one after another, it is possible to make it appear as if the end of the game is gradually approaching.

If the special symbol lottery results in a loss, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 will stop and display "145," which is a loss, as shown in Figure 59 (D). As a result, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the post-normal transition substitute effect will be executed from the transition to normal game mode until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times. In this way, by executing the post-normal transition substitute effect shown in Figure 59 from the transition to normal game mode until game play is stopped, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the game will become unplayable, compared to when the post-normal transition-only effect shown in Figure 58 is executed. In other words, the post-normal transition substitute effect shown in Figure 59 can make it easier for the player to understand that the game is gradually approaching a situation where it will no longer be playable.

<Fifth Modification>
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (the game stop flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 101 executes the launch control process (S109), and after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the launch control process (S109). In contrast, in the fifth modified example, as shown in FIG. 60, the launch control process (S109) is not provided in the main timer interrupt process (S006). In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the launch control process (S109) regardless of the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function. In this fifth modified example, the launch of game balls is controlled by the payout control microcomputer 171 provided on the payout control board 170.

In short, in the above embodiment, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the launch control process (S109), and therefore the game ball is not launched towards the play area 6. In contrast, in the fifth variant, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not stop controlling the launch of the game ball, and therefore the game ball is launched towards the play area 6. In this case, even though the game is not playable, the player may mistakenly believe that the game may be playable because the game ball can be launched.

In the fifth variant, therefore, after the game has become unplayable, a contact warning effect (warning effect) is executed when the player touches the handle 72k. In the fifth variant, a handle contact detection sensor is provided on the handle 72k. The handle contact detection sensor detects contact of the human body with the handle 72k. In other words, the handle contact detection sensor detects contact with the handle 72k simply by the player touching the handle 72k before rotating it. In this way, when the player touches the handle 72k, a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor is output to the effect control microcomputer 121. Below, with reference to Figure 61, we will explain the contact warning effect that is executed after the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated.

Figure 61 shows a case where a contact warning effect (warning effect) is executed after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. First, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error release method image ERX on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 61 (A), and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off.

If the player then touches the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes a contact warning effect while the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 61(B). That is, the display screen 50a displays a contact warning image HU indicating "Please release your hands from the handle." Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a sound saying "Please release your hands from the handle," and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 are all lit in red. This contact warning effect makes the player even more aware that he or she cannot touch the handle 72k and therefore cannot play the game.

After that, when the player stops touching the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops receiving detection signals from the handle contact detection sensor. This causes the effect control microcomputer 121 to stop the contact warning effect, as shown in Figure 61 (C). In this way, in this embodiment, after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the contact warning effect is executed as long as the player is touching the handle 72k.

Figure 62 shows a case where a contact warning effect (warning effect) is executed after an illegal magnetism is detected. First, when an illegal magnetism is detected, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error release method image ER1 on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 62 (A), and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off.

If the player then touches the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes a contact warning effect while the red background image RE and error release method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 62(B). That is, the display screen 50a displays a contact warning image HU indicating "Please release your hands from the handle." Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a sound saying "Please release your hands from the handle," and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 are all lit in red. This contact warning effect makes the player even more aware that he or she cannot touch the handle 72k and therefore cannot play the game.

After that, when the player stops touching the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops receiving detection signals from the handle contact detection sensor. This causes the effect control microcomputer 121 to stop the contact warning effect, as shown in Figure 62 (C). Thus, in this embodiment, after an illegal magnetism is detected, the contact warning effect is executed as long as the player is touching the handle 72k.

In this fifth variant, even if the excess prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is disabled, the player can still rotate the handle 72k to launch game balls toward the game area 6. However, if the player is touching the handle 72k, a contact warning display is executed to alert the player, as shown in Figure 61 (B). This makes it possible for a player who is touching the handle 72k even though the game is disabled to realize that they need to remove their hands from the handle 72k, and to reliably understand that the game is disabled.

In addition, in the fifth variant, even if an illegal magnetism is detected and the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, the player can still rotate the handle 72k to launch the game ball toward the game area 6. However, if the player is touching the handle 72k, a contact warning display is executed to warn the player, as shown in Figure 62 (B). This makes it possible for a player who is touching the handle 72k even though the game is not playable to realize that they need to remove their hand from the handle 72k, and to reliably understand that the game is not playable.

<Sixth Modification>
In the second modified example, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the round substitute effect shown in Fig. 55(B), the time-saving mode substitute effect shown in Fig. 55(C), and the remaining reserve substitute special effect shown in Fig. 56 are executed. In contrast, in the sixth modified example, the round substitute effect (substitute effect) shown in Fig. 63(B) and the probability variable mode substitute effect (substitute effect) shown in Fig. 63(C) are executed. In this sixth modified example, as in the above-mentioned form, the machine is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more and the machine transitions from the high base state to the normal gaming state, the excess prize ball prevention function is activated to disable the game.

In this sixth variant, assume that during a jackpot game, a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 63 (A). Here, as shown in Figure 53, assume that the difference in ball count reaches 80,000 during the jackpot game state. As a result, a round substitution effect is executed, as shown in Figure 63 (B). That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitution background image G116 depicting a dark Western-style mansion and a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" are displayed. After that, when the jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a high probability high base state.

In the high probability high base state, instead of the probability mode presentation shown in FIG. 18 (B-4),
A probability variable mode alternative effect shown in FIG. 63(C) is executed. Specifically, in the probability variable mode alternative effect, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a probability variable alternative background image G118 depicting a black hole in outer space is displayed. Then, the effect symbol EZ is displayed superimposed on the probability variable alternative background image G118. Furthermore, a warning display image G115 displaying a police lamp and the word "DANGER" is displayed at the forefront of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention. Furthermore, a remaining game suspension count image LN3 indicating "160 remaining games until game suspension" is displayed superimposed on the probability variable alternative background image G118. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of times the special symbol will change before game execution is no longer possible. The number of times indicated by the remaining game suspension count image LN3 is counted down by one each time the special symbol change display is executed. The display of this remaining game suspension count image LN3 corresponds to a "game unplayable notice effect."

In this way, when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the probability mode alternative presentation shown in Figure 63 (C) is executed in the high probability, high base state before play becomes impossible. This makes it possible for the player to be more aware of the situation in which play becomes impossible than when the probability mode presentation shown in Figure 18 (B-4) is executed. Furthermore, by watching the countdown of the remaining number of times play can be stopped image LN3, it is possible to provide a tense game in which the player wonders whether they will be able to hit a jackpot and continue playing, or whether they will not be able to hit a jackpot and be unable to continue playing.

<Seventh Modification>
In the sixth modified example, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the round substitute effect shown in Fig. 63(B) and the probability variable mode substitute effect shown in Fig. 63(C) are executed. In contrast, in the seventh modified example, only the round substitute effect shown in Fig. 64(B) is executed. In this seventh modified example, as in the above-mentioned form, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state (jackpot game) ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated to disable the game.

In this seventh variant, during a jackpot game, a round effect is executed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 64 (A). Here, if the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the jackpot game state, a round substitution effect is executed, as shown in Figure 64 (B). That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitution background image G116 depicting a dark Western-style mansion and a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" are displayed. Furthermore, at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a game stop warning image KL indicating "game will be stopped when the jackpot ends" is displayed. The display of this game stop warning image KL corresponds to a "game impossible warning effect."

In this way, when the difference in ball count reaches 80,000 or more, the round presentation shown in Figure 64(A) switches to the round replacement presentation shown in Figure 64(B). This makes it possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which they will no longer be able to play. Furthermore, it is possible to make a player who sees the game stop warning image KL understand in advance that they will no longer be able to play once the currently playing jackpot game ends.

<Eighth Modification>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 or more, the display of the over-prize ball warning image KY (pre-warning effect) shown in FIG. 28(A) warns that the game will become unplayable. In contrast, in the eighth modified example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, the reference number reaching warning effect warns that the game will become unplayable. The reference number reaching warning effect (pre-warning effect), as will be described in detail later, is a display that warns that the game will become unplayable while indicating that the difference in the number of balls is reaching the reference number of 80,000. Like the above-mentioned embodiment, this eighth modified example is configured as a type 1 gaming machine. When the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, preventing the game from being played.

Here, we will explain the difference in ball count (78,500) that triggers the reference number reaching notification effect. In the eighth variant, as in the above embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot patterns) that can be won include jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, and jackpot pattern Z (see FIG. 12 (B)). The jackpot game (jackpot game X) when jackpot pattern X is won is essentially 5R (see FIG. 16), and is set to award 750 prize balls. The jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when jackpot pattern Y is won is essentially 4R (see FIG. 16), and is set to award 600 prize balls. The jackpot game (jackpot game Z) when jackpot pattern Z is won is essentially 10R (see FIG. 16), and is set to award 1,500 prize balls (the specified number).

In the eighth variant, therefore, of the jackpot symbols that can be won, jackpot symbol Z is the jackpot symbol that can award the largest number of prize balls. Therefore, in the eighth variant, the difference in number of balls (specific number) that triggers the reference number reaching notification effect is set to the reference number of 80,000 minus the number of prize balls (1,500) that are set to be awarded for jackpot symbol Z. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65, if the difference in number of balls in a certain jackpot game state is 78,500 or more, there is a possibility that the difference in number of balls in the next jackpot game state will be 80,000 or more. Taking into account the possibility that the difference in number of balls may be 80,000 or more in the next jackpot game state, the difference in number of balls (78,500) that triggers the reference number reaching notification effect is set to the reference number (80,000) minus the number of prize balls (1,500) of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol Z) that can award the most prize balls in a single jackpot game.

Incidentally, it is expected that the difference in ball count will reach the reference number of 80,000 when the so-called rush state (high probability high base state or small win rush state (high probability low base state) for Type 1 gaming machines, or time-saving state for Type 1/2 gaming machines) continues, and the jackpot game state is reached when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery. For this reason, it can be said that the difference in ball count that triggers the reference number reaching notice display should preferably be the reference number minus the number of prize balls (1,500) for the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z) that can award the most prize balls among the jackpot patterns that can be won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, rather than the jackpot pattern that can be won in the Special Chart 1 lottery.

In particular, in the eighth variant, the jackpot symbol that can be won in the lottery for special chart 2 is jackpot symbol Z, and there is only one type. Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls (78,500), which triggers the reference number reaching notice performance, is set to the reference number (80,000) minus the number of prize balls (1,500) that can be awarded with that jackpot symbol Z, it is possible to create a situation in which, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more in a jackpot game state during an ongoing rush state, the difference in the number of balls will reach the reference number (80,000) with a high probability in the next jackpot game state.

Next, the presentation of the eighth modified example will be explained based on Figure 66. As a prerequisite, it is assumed that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this case, as shown in Figure 66 (A), the display screen 7a displays a round image G109, a prize ball count image G110, and a round background image G114. Here, as shown in Figure 65 (A), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 sends an over-prize ball notification command (see step S307) to the presentation control microcomputer 121, and the presentation control microcomputer 121 recognizes that the difference in the number of balls has reached 78,500 or more. As a result, the presentation control microcomputer 121 executes the next jackpot arrival notification presentation shown in Figure 66 (B).

Specifically, in the next jackpot arrival notice effect, as shown in Figure 66 (B), a next jackpot arrival notice image ZY is displayed, indicating "There may be an abnormality in the number of excess balls at the end of the next jackpot." This allows the player to understand in advance that once the next jackpot game ends, the game may become unplayable. This next jackpot arrival notice effect is executed when the reference number arrival notice effect starts as part of the reference number arrival notice effect (advance notice effect).

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (C), a running-up effect and a mini-screen effect are executed. The running-up effect is an effect that shows the process of the difference in ball count going from 78,500 to 80,000 depending on the positional relationship between the character and the slope. This running-up effect is executed in the main display area 51a (large display area) of the display screen 50a, excluding the lower right display area 51b. Furthermore, the running-up effect can continue to be executed asynchronously (unrelatedly) with the currently executing jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) and variable effect, until the difference in ball count reaches 80,000.

On the other hand, the mini screen effect is an effect that executes effects (jackpot effect, variable effect, customer waiting effect, etc.) that were executed when the difference in ball count was less than 78,500 in the lower right display area 51b (small display area) of the display screen 50a. In other words, the mini screen effect causes effects that were executed on the entire display screen 50a when the difference in ball count was less than 78,500 to be executed in a reduced form in the lower right display area 51b. In this way, when the difference in ball count becomes 78,500 or more, the player is directed to focus primarily on the process by which the difference in ball count goes from 78,500 to 80,000, with the jackpot effect and variable effect being shown secondary.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the running-up effect displays a running-up image KG in which a specific character runs up a slope from the bottom toward the goal at the top. The running-up image KG indicates the current difference in ball count based on the character's position relative to the slope. That is, if the difference in ball count is 78,500, the character is located at the bottom of the slope, and if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, the character is located at the top of the slope, which is the goal. Note that if the difference in ball count falls below 78,500, the character disappears from the main display area 51a. If the difference in ball count falls below 78,000 (the lower limit of the effect), the running-up effect and mini-screen effect are stopped, and the effect that was being executed in the mini-screen effect is executed across the entire display screen 7a. Thus, after the running-up effect is initiated, it continues to be executed only when the difference in ball count is 78,000 (the lower limit of the effect) or more, clearly indicating to the player that the over-prize ball prevention function is about to be activated. The rising effect is a part of the target number reaching notification effect (pre-notification effect) that is executed after the next jackpot reaching notification effect.

As shown in Figure 66 (C), when the running-up effect is executed, a mini-screen effect is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, displaying a mini-winning ball count image g110 showing "750pt" and a mini-round background image g114. However, even when the mini-screen effect is executed, the round image G109 and right-hit image G108G are displayed in the main display area 51a. This is because the round image G109 and right-hit image G108G are images that indicate the progress of the game and how to play, and it is preferable to display them larger and more clearly to the player than other effect images.

As the round progresses and the player receives more prize balls, a mini prize ball count image g110 showing "1395pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, as shown in Figure 66 (D). At this time, the main display area 51a shows a running-up image KG in which the character runs higher up the slope than the position shown in Figure 66 (C). In this way, in the running-up image KG, the greater the difference in the number of balls, the higher the character is positioned up the slope, giving the player a visually easy-to-understand indication of the current difference in the number of balls.

Next, when the round of play ends and the ending begins, as shown in Figure 67(A), a mini ending image g111 is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, suggesting the probability variation mode that will be set after a jackpot. Next, when the high probability high base state is entered, as shown in Figure 67(B), a mini probability variation background image g105 is displayed in the lower right display area 51b. Furthermore, in the lower right display area 51b, a mini variation pattern ez (reduced variation pattern) smaller than the variation pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner and then statically displayed. Thus, while the mini screen variation is being performed, the display mode of the mini variation patterns ez (left mini variation pattern ez1, middle mini variation pattern ez2, right mini variation pattern ez3) allows the player to understand the results of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the running-up effect shown in Figure 67 (B) shows a running-up image KG in which the character is running lower up the slope than the position shown in Figure 66 (C). This is because the number of balls fired has increased since the end of the jackpot game, reducing the difference in the number of balls between the winner and loser. In this way, even when the difference in the number of balls between the winner and loser has reduced, the running-up effect visually shows the player how large the difference in the number of balls is at the moment, depending on the position of the character. The running-up effect executed in the main display area 51a is asynchronous with the mini-variable effect (a display involving the variable and stationary display of the mini-variable effect symbol ez) executed in the lower right display area 51b. Therefore, the player can enjoy both the running-up effect, which shows the difference in the number of balls between the winner and loser, and the mini-variable effect, which shows whether or not there has been a win, in parallel.

After that, as shown in Figure 67 (C), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini SP reach background image g113 is displayed, showing the main character and enemy character fighting, with the left mini performance pattern ez1 and the right mini performance pattern ez3 in a reach state. This allows the player to understand the large difference in the number of balls in the main display area 51a, while also understanding the high probability of winning in the lower right display area 51b.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (D), the bottom right display area 51b displays a mini SP reach background image g113 showing the main character rejoicing at having won the battle, and the left mini effect pattern ez1, middle mini effect pattern ez2, and right mini effect pattern ez3 are displayed stopped in a jackpot pattern (stop pattern "555" indicating a jackpot). This allows the player to understand that they have won a jackpot in the bottom right display area 51b. The display of the mini SP reach background image g113 showing the main character rejoicing at having won the battle corresponds to a "reduced jackpot suggestion effect."

After that, the jackpot game begins, and once the opening is over, the round game begins. As a result, when the game progresses to the fifth round, as shown in Figure 68 (A), the mini prize ball count image g110 showing "730 points" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b. At this time, the main display area 51a shows a running uphill image KG of a character running near the top of a slope (close to the finish line). At the time shown in Figure 68 (A), the difference in ball count is 79,985.

When the game ball enters the first large prize slot 14, as shown in Figure 68 (B), a mini prize ball count image g110 showing "745 points" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b. At this time, a running-up image KG is displayed in the main display area 51a, indicating that the character has reached the top of the slope (the goal). This makes it easy for the player to understand that the difference in ball count has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (C), the running-up effect ends in the main display area 51a, and a celebration effect is executed (see Figure 65). During the celebration effect, a celebration image SF stating "Congratulations on reaching 80,000 balls!!" is displayed in the main display area 51a. This gives the player a sense of accomplishment for having reached 80,000 balls. In other words, the celebration effect gives the player a sense of accomplishment for having created an extremely rare situation, without making the player aware of the disadvantage of having to stop play when the difference in balls reaches 80,000 or more. The celebration effect continues in the main display area 51a until the jackpot game ends. Then, mini-screen effects (round effect, ending effect) continue to be executed in the lower-right display area 51b.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the excess ball prevention function is activated, and game play is disabled. At this time, the celebration effect in the main display area 51a and the mini screen effect in the lower right display area 51b end, and as shown in Figure 68 (D), the display screen 50a displays a red background image RE along with an error release method image ERX indicating "Error X Excessive ball abnormality Please clear RAM." A game stop sound is also output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a situation has arisen in which game play is no longer possible.

In this eighth variant, as shown in Figure 65, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, a reference number reaching notification effect (next jackpot reaching notification effect (see Figure 66 (B)), rushing effect (see Figures 66 (C) to 68 (B))) is executed. This reference number reaching notification effect is executed asynchronously with the effects currently being executed (jackpot effects, variable effects, etc.), and continues until the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. In this way, from the time the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more until it reaches 80,000 or more, it can be made to appear to the player that the game is becoming impossible to play in a natural flow due to the reference number reaching notification effect that is executed asynchronously.

Also, in the eighth variant, as shown in Figures 67(B) to (D), while the running-up effect (reference number reaching notice effect) is being executed, mini-effect symbols eg1, ez2, and ez3 are displayed in a fluctuating manner and then stopped in the lower right display area 51b. In this way, mini-effect symbols eg1, ez2, and ez3, which replace effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, indicate the results of the jackpot determination process, while preventing the running-up effect (reference number reaching notice effect), which indicates the current difference in the number of balls, from becoming difficult to understand.

Furthermore, in the eighth variant, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), if a running-up effect (reference number reaching notice effect) is being executed and it is suggested that a jackpot game will be played, a mini SP reach background image g113, which is a reduced version of the SP reach background image G113 shown in FIG. 21 (C-1), is displayed. In this way, the mini SP reach background image g113 that replaces the SP reach background image G113 suggests that a jackpot game will be played, while preventing the running-up effect (reference number reaching notice effect) that indicates the current difference in the number of balls from becoming difficult to understand.

Also, in the eighth variant, as shown in Figure 65, if the number of winning balls falls below the number of prize balls (1,500) awarded in one jackpot game (jackpot game Z (see Figure 16)) before the difference in balls reaches 80,000, a reference number reaching notification effect (next jackpot reaching notification effect, rising effect) is executed. In this way, the reference number reaching notification effect is executed only in situations where it is likely that the game will be impossible to play in the next jackpot game. In other words, even if the difference in balls is significantly smaller than 80,000, such as 70,000, the reference number reaching notification effect will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to set the timing of the execution of the reference number reaching notification effect (next jackpot reaching notification effect, rising effect) so as not to cause discomfort to the player.

<Ninth Modification>
In the eighth modified example, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) that can be won in the lottery for special chart 2 is only the jackpot symbol Z (see FIG. 12(B)). In contrast, in the ninth modified example, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) that can be won in the lottery for special chart 2 is configured to have two types: the jackpot symbol Z1 and the jackpot symbol Z2 (see FIG. 69). The following explanation will focus on the differences from the eighth modified example.

In the ninth variant, as shown in Figure 69, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 2, if the random number value for the jackpot symbol type is "0-7", the jackpot symbol will be Z1 (second jackpot), and if the random number value for the jackpot symbol type is "8-9", the jackpot symbol will be Z2 (first jackpot). As with the eighth variant, there are two types of jackpots that can be won in the lottery for special chart 1: jackpot symbol X and jackpot symbol Y.

In the ninth variant, as shown in FIG. 70, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when jackpot pattern Z1 is won is essentially 10R, and is set up so that 1,500 (second specified number) prize balls can be awarded. On the other hand, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when jackpot pattern Z2 is won is essentially 3R, and is set up so that 450 (first specified number) prize balls can be awarded. As a result, in the ninth variant, it is set up so that many prize balls can be awarded in one jackpot game in the following order: jackpot pattern Z2 won in the lottery for special chart 2 < jackpot pattern Y won in the lottery for special chart 1 < jackpot pattern X won in the lottery for special chart 1 < jackpot pattern Z1 won in the lottery for special chart 2.

Here, in the ninth variant, as shown in FIG. 71, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect (see FIG. 72 (C)), described below, is executed. The next jackpot arrival suggestion effect (pre-notification effect) is an effect that notifies players that the game will become unplayable, and is an effect that suggests that the difference in the number of balls may reach 80,000 during the next jackpot game. However, unlike the eighth variant, the ninth variant does not necessarily execute the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more. In other words, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect (pre-notification effect) in the ninth variant is executed only at the ending of a jackpot game. In this way, by executing the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect only at the ending of a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent players who are enjoying a jackpot game (especially a round game) from becoming overly aware of the excess prize ball prevention function.

In the ninth variant, as shown in Figure 71, after the ending in which the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is executed, the mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect (see Figure 72 (D)) described below is executed in the post-jackpot gaming state (high probability, high base state). After that, if the difference in the number of balls in the next jackpot gaming state becomes 80,000 or more, the game will be controlled to be unplayable at the time that the jackpot gaming state ends.

Next, an example of the presentation of the ninth variant will be explained based on Figure 72. As a prerequisite, assume that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the difference in the number of balls during a round of play is 78,500 or more (see Figure 71 (A)). At this time, as shown in Figure 72 (A), the display screen 50a displays a prize ball count image G110 indicating "750 pt" and a round background image G114. However, even though the difference in the number of balls is 78,500 or more, no presentation is executed to warn that the game will become impossible to play. After that, when the round of play ends and the ending begins, an ending image G111 suggesting a probability variation presentation mode is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 72 (B).

Next, during this ending, as shown in Figure 72 (C), a next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, during the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect, a next jackpot arrival suggestion image ZK is displayed on the display screen 50a, indicating "There may be an excess ball count at the end of the next jackpot." This allows the player to understand in advance that the game may become unplayable once the next jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in a jackpot game when the difference in ball count is 78,500 or more, this next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is not executed before the ending starts, but is executed after the ending starts, so the player does not become aware of the excess ball prevention function during the round of play. This makes it possible to prevent the next jackpot arrival notice image ZY (see Figure 66 (B)) from being displayed during the round of play, as in the eighth variant, which can be annoying to the player.

After that, when the ending ends and the game transitions to a high probability, high base state, as shown in Figure 72 (D), the display screen 50a displays the background image G105 for the probability change and executes a mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect. Specifically, in the mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect, a mini next jackpot arrival suggestion image zk is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a, indicating "There may be an abnormality in the number of excess balls at the end of the next jackpot." This mini next jackpot arrival suggestion image zk is smaller than the next jackpot arrival suggestion image ZK displayed in the ending described above, and is less likely to obstruct the visibility of the effect pattern EZ.

In this way, the mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect makes it possible for players to be aware that even while playing in a high probability, high base state, the game may become unplayable once the next jackpot game ends. The mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect continues to be executed until the high probability, high base state ends. After that, as shown in Figure 71, a jackpot is won in a high probability, high base state, and the difference in ball count during that jackpot game state becomes 80,000 or more. Then, once that jackpot game state ends, the game will be controlled so that it cannot be played.

In this ninth variant, as shown in FIG. 69, the types of jackpots include jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, and jackpot symbol Z2. In particular, in a rush state (high probability, high base state), it is generally assumed that a jackpot will be won by drawing special symbol 2, and the types of jackpots won by drawing special symbol 2 include jackpot symbol Z1 (first win) and jackpot symbol Z2 (second win). In jackpot game Z1 based on winning jackpot symbol Z1, 1,500 prize balls are awarded, while in jackpot game Z2 based on winning jackpot symbol Z2, 450 prize balls are awarded.

In this setting, in the ninth variant, as shown in FIG. 71, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is initiated when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more. In other words, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is initiated when the difference in the number of balls reaches 1,500 or less, the number of prize balls awarded in jackpot game Z1, before it reaches 80,000. In this way, even if there are multiple types of wins, it is possible to start the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect assuming that the player will win the next jackpot on jackpot pattern Z1, which is advantageous to the player. In particular, even though there are four types of wins, it is possible to start the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect assuming that the player will win the next jackpot on jackpot pattern Z1, which is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the ninth variant, if the difference in the number of balls during a jackpot game reaches 78,500 or more, a display suggesting the next jackpot will begin during the ending of that jackpot game, as shown in Figure 72 (C). This makes it possible for the next jackpot arrival display to make the player aware of a situation that may make it impossible to play the next jackpot game just before the jackpot game ends. In other words, even if the difference in the number of balls during a jackpot game reaches 78,500 or more, the display suggesting the next jackpot will not begin until the ending begins. This allows the player to enjoy the jackpot game without being overly aware that they will be unable to play.

<Tenth Modification>
In the ninth modification, a next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is executed to warn that the game will become unplayable if the difference in the number of balls exceeds 78,500. In contrast, in the tenth modification, an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect (pre-notification effect) is executed to warn that the game will become unplayable if the difference in the number of balls exceeds 79,550. Note that in the tenth modification, as in the ninth modification, the types of jackpots that can be won include jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, and jackpot symbol Z2 (see Figures 69 and 70). The following will focus on the differences from the ninth modification. In the tenth modification, in the difference in the number of balls calculation process (S303) shown in Figure 34, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a difference in the number of balls command containing information on the calculated difference in the number of balls to the presentation control board 120, allowing the presentation control microcomputer 121 to continuously grasp the difference in the number of balls.

In the tenth variant, we will explain the difference in the number of balls (79,550) that triggers the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect. In the tenth variant, in a jackpot game (jackpot game X) when jackpot pattern X is won, 750 prize balls are set to be awarded. In a jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when jackpot pattern Y is won, 600 prize balls are set to be awarded. In a jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when jackpot pattern Z1 (second win) is won, 1,500 prize balls are set to be awarded. In a jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when jackpot pattern Z2 (first win) is won, 450 prize balls are set to be awarded.

Therefore, in the tenth variant, of the possible winning jackpot symbols, jackpot symbol Z2 is the jackpot symbol with the fewest possible number of prize balls. Therefore, in the tenth variant, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is set to the base number of 80,000 minus the number of prize balls that are set to be awarded for jackpot symbol Z2 (450, the first specified number). As a result, as shown in Figure 73, if the difference in the number of balls in a certain jackpot game state is 79,550 or more, there is an extremely high possibility that the difference in the number of balls will be 80,000 or more in that jackpot game state or the next jackpot game state. As a result of the above, unless the difference in the number of balls decreases, the difference in the number of balls will almost certainly be 80,000 or more by the time the next jackpot game state occurs. Therefore, the difference in the number of balls (79,550) that triggers the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is set to the reference number (80,000) minus the number of prize balls (450) for the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z2) that can award the fewest prize balls in one jackpot game.

In this tenth variant, as shown in Figure 73, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed. In other words, unlike the ninth variant, the effect suggesting the next jackpot is not initiated after the ending of the jackpot game has started based on the difference in the number of balls reaching 79,550 or more (see Figure 71). This is because, in a certain jackpot game (round game), when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, the difference in the number of balls in that ongoing jackpot game (round game) may reach 80,000 or more. In this case, if the excessive ball abnormality notification effect were to start after the ending had started, the excessive ball abnormality notification effect would start just before the jackpot game ended. This would make the player aware that the game would become unplayable just before the game was stopped, which is not desirable timing for the excessive ball abnormality notification effect to be executed.

Next, an example of the presentation of the tenth variant will be explained based on Figure 74. As a prerequisite, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the difference in the number of balls is slightly less than 79,550. At this time, as shown in Figure 74 (A), the display screen 50a displays a prize ball count image G110 showing "1200 pt" and a round background image G114. Then, suppose that a game ball enters the first jackpot opening 14, and the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more.

At this time, as shown in Figure 74 (B), an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, an over-prize ball abnormality notification image ZI is displayed, indicating "450 more balls remaining, over-prize ball abnormality." This allows the player to understand in advance that if the difference in the number of balls increases by another 450, the game will become unplayable. This over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed for only about 5 seconds (a predetermined number of seconds), and when the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect ends, the remaining ball number notification effect begins.

The residual ball count notification display notifies the player of how many balls must remain before the game becomes unplayable (a prize-ball abnormality occurs). Specifically, after the ball count difference reaches 79,550 or more, as shown in Figure 74 (C), a residual ball count notification image ZS indicating "300 more balls remaining, excessive prize ball abnormality" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a as a residual ball count notification display. The number shown in the residual ball count notification image ZS is the value obtained by subtracting the current number of balls from 80,000, and is updated whenever the ball count difference changes. In this way, the residual ball count notification display allows the player to accurately and at any time know how many balls must remain before the game becomes unplayable (a prize-ball abnormality occurs).

As shown in Figure 73, this residual ball number notification effect is not only executed in the jackpot game state after the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, but also continues to be executed in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game state. In other words, as shown in Figure 74 (D), even when the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner in the high probability high base state, the residual ball number notification effect is executed on the bottom of the display screen 50a. In this way, in the 10th variant, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, it is possible to keep track of the difference in the number of balls at any time until the next jackpot game begins.

However, in the tenth variant, the residual ball number notification effect will no longer be executed if the difference in the number of balls falls below 78,500 (the lower limit of the effect). This is because, by the time the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, more prize balls will be required than the number of prize balls (1,500) for the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z1) that can award the most prize balls in a single jackpot game. In other words, after the next jackpot game has ended, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, taking into account that the excessive prize ball prevention function will not operate. This makes it possible to prevent the residual ball number notification effect from being executed even when the difference in the number of balls is well below 80,000, causing discomfort to the player.

In this tenth variant, as shown in FIG. 73, an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed when the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more. In other words, the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed when the difference in the number of balls becomes 450 or less, the number of prize balls awarded in jackpot game Z2, before it reaches 80,000. In this way, even if there are multiple types of wins, it is possible to execute an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect in the event that the next jackpot win will result in a jackpot pattern Z2 that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the event that the game will likely become unplayable at least by the end of the next jackpot game. In particular, even though there are four types of wins, it is possible to execute an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect in the event that the next jackpot win will result in a jackpot pattern Z2 that is most disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth variant, as shown in Figure 73, the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more. In this way, by synchronizing the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more with the timing when the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that there are only a single number of prize balls left to be awarded in one jackpot game before the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000.

<Eleventh Modification>
In the above-mentioned tenth modified example, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect was fixed at 79,550. Also, the residual ball number notice effect was to be executed in the jackpot game state and the game state after the jackpot game (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, normal game state) after the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect was executed (see FIG. 73). However, the above-mentioned tenth modified example has the following problems.

The difference in balls that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality warning effect is 79,550, but players may feel that there is only a short time left until the difference in balls reaches 80,000 or more, and that the timing of the over-prize ball abnormality warning effect's start is too late. Furthermore, the residual ball number notification effect was always executed in the jackpot game state and post-jackpot game state after the over-prize ball abnormality warning effect was executed, but players may find it annoying to be constantly notified of the difference in balls. In particular, when the residual ball number notification effect is always executed in the high probability high base state, low probability high base state, and normal game state, it shows that the remaining difference in balls until the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is gradually increasing. This clearly shows the player, in numbers, that the number of balls they have is constantly decreasing, which may be unpleasant for the player.

To address the above-mentioned issues, the tenth variant allows arcade employees to set the difference in ball count that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect, as well as whether or not the residual ball count notification effect will be executed. Specifically, by pressing the normal button 40 five times within 30 seconds after the RAM clear is initiated, the initial function setting image FS (see Figure 75(B)), described below, is displayed. Then, by switching from the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX (see Figure 75(C)), described below, arcade employees can set the difference in ball count that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. Furthermore, by switching from the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY (see Figure 75(D)), described below, they can set whether or not the residual ball count notification effect will be executed. Here, the display of the excessive ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX or the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY corresponds to "initial setting after power is turned on."

Next, based on Figure 75, the settings of the display items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect (advance notification effect) and the setting of the display items related to the residual ball number notification effect (advance notification effect) will be explained. Display items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect include whether or not to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect, and the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. Display items related to the residual ball number notification effect include whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect at the opening of a jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect during a round of jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect at the ending of a jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect every time a variable effect is executed, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect every five variable effects, and whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect during a variable effect.

As shown in Figure 75(A), when RAM clearing begins after power-on, the display screen 50a displays a RAM clear notification image RC stating, "Please wait a moment. If you press the push button five times during the RAM clear notification, the initial function setting image will be displayed." This allows arcade employees to understand that RAM clearing has been performed. The RAM clear notification image RC is displayed for only 30 seconds after RAM clearing begins. Therefore, if arcade employees press the normal button 40 five times while the RAM clear notification image RC is displayed, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed, as shown in Figure 75(B).

In this way, in the 11th variant, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed, and the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notification display and the residual ball count notification display can be set, provided that RAM clearing has been performed. In other words, unless RAM clearing is performed, the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notification display and the residual ball count notification display cannot be changed.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), the initial function setting image FS includes an item for "Switch to setting screen" in the "Over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting," an item for "Switch to setting screen" in the "Residual ball count notification effect setting," and an item for "Switch to setting screen" in the "Other effect settings." Therefore, by using the select button to position the cursor over various items and pressing the normal button 40, an arcade employee can display the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 75(C), the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 75(D), or other effect setting images (not shown). Note that while the initial function setting image FS is displayed, positioning the cursor over the "Back" item and pressing the normal button 40 will terminate the display of the initial function setting image FS. If the RAM has been cleared after that, a customer waiting effect will be displayed on the display screen 50a.

As shown in Figure 75 (C), in the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX, under "Set the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect ON/OFF," there is an item indicating "ON" and an item indicating "OFF." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "ON," the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "OFF," the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is set not to be executed.

In addition, the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX allows you to select a five-digit number in the "Set the difference in number of balls to activate the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect" field. Therefore, by using the select button to select a five-digit number, the difference in number of balls (specific number) that will trigger the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect to begin is set. The difference in number of balls that will trigger the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect to begin is set to 78,500 by default (initial setting value). Note that if the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is set not to be executed, the five-digit number cannot be selected. While the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX is displayed, if you position the cursor on the "Back" item and press the normal button 40, the settings will be confirmed and the display will return to the initial function setting image FS.

As shown in Figure 75 (D), in the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY, under "Set the residual ball count notification effect ON/OFF," there is an item indicating "ON" and an item indicating "OFF." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "ON," the residual ball count notification effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "OFF," the residual ball count notification effect is set to not be executed.

In addition, the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY has an item for "Opening ON" and an item for "Opening OFF" under "Set ON/OFF during jackpot." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the item for "Opening ON," the residual ball count notification effect is set to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game, provided that the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the item for "Opening OFF," the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game. Note that if the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed, the item for "Opening ON" cannot be selected.

In addition, the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY has an item indicating "Round play ON" and an item indicating "Round play OFF" under "Set ON/OFF during jackpot." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "Round play ON," the residual ball count notification effect is set to be executed during round play in jackpot play, provided that the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the item indicating "Round play OFF," the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed during round play in jackpot play. Note that if the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed, the item indicating "Round play ON" cannot be selected.

In addition, the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY has an item for "Ending ON" and an item for "Ending OFF" under "Set ON/OFF during jackpot." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the item for "Ending ON," the residual ball count notification effect is set to be executed at the end of the jackpot game, provided that the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the item for "Ending OFF," the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed at the end of the jackpot game. Note that if the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed, the item for "Ending ON" cannot be selected.

In addition, the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY, under "Set ON/OFF during variable effect," has an option for "always ON," an option for "every 5 changes," and an option for "OFF." Therefore, when the cursor is placed over the option for "always ON," the residual ball count notification effect is set to be executed every time a variable effect is executed (for each variable effect). On the other hand, when the cursor is placed over the option for "every 5 changes," the residual ball count notification effect is executed every five times a variable effect is executed (the setting is such that the residual ball count notification effect is not executed after four variable effects, but is executed after the fifth variable effect). In contrast, when the cursor is placed over the option for "OFF," the residual ball count notification effect is set to never be executed during a variable effect. Note that if the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball count notification effect is set not to be executed, the options for "always ON" or "every 5 changes" cannot be selected. While the residual ball count notification effect setting image SY is displayed, if you move the cursor to the "Back" item and press the normal button 40, the settings you made will be confirmed and the display will return to the initial function setting image FS.

Next, an example of the presentation of the 11th modified example will be explained based on Figure 76. As a prerequisite, it is assumed that the excessive prize ball abnormality notification presentation is set to be executed, and the difference in the number of balls that triggers the excessive prize ball abnormality notification presentation is set to 75,000 (a specific number). It is also assumed that the residual ball number notification presentation is set to be executed, and that the residual ball number notification presentation is set not to be executed during the opening and round play of a jackpot game, and that the residual ball number notification presentation is set to be executed at the ending of a jackpot game. It is also assumed that the residual ball number notification presentation is set not to be executed during a variable presentation.

In this setting, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (a round of play is being played) and the difference in the number of balls is slightly less than 75,000. At this time, as shown in Figure 76 (A), the display screen 50a displays a prize ball count image G110 showing "1,450 points" and a round background image G114. Then, a game ball enters the second jackpot opening 15, and the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the display screen 50a displays an over-prize ball abnormality notification image ZI indicating "5,000 more balls remaining, over-prize ball abnormality." In this way, as set by the arcade employee, it is possible to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect based on the difference in the number of balls (75,000) that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. After that, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed during the ongoing round of play. Then, when the jackpot game transitions to the ending, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the display screen 50a displays an ending image G111 suggesting a probability variation mode, and a residual ball number notification image ZS indicating "4,950 more balls remaining, over-prize ball abnormality." In this way, as set by the arcade employee, the residual ball number notification effect is executed only at the ending of the jackpot game. This allows the player to enjoy the round of play without becoming overly conscious of the difference in the number of balls.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends and the game transitions to a high-probability, high-base state, the display screen 50a displays the background image G105 for the probability change, and a variable effect is executed. At this time, the residual ball count notification image ZS is not displayed. In this way, as set by the arcade employee, the residual ball count notification effect is never executed while the variable effect is being executed. This prevents the player from seeing the number of balls they have decreasing as numbers while the variable effect is being executed (in the high-probability, high-base state, low-probability, and normal game state), which makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In this 11th variant, after the power is turned on, while the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is displayed, an arcade employee can set the presentation items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect and the residual ball number notification effect by operating the normal button 40 and select button. In particular, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect can be set as desired. In this way, arcade employees can optimally adjust the execution timing of the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect as appropriate depending on the situation.

In addition, in the 11th variant, the amusement parlor staff can set whether or not the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect will be executed as a performance item related to the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect. Therefore, if it is desired that the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect not be executed, the amusement parlor staff can set the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect not to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent players who do not want the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect to be executed from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the abnormal over-prize ball notification effect.

<Twelfth Modification>
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, even after the game has been controlled to be unplayable, ball lending is executed when the player or the like presses the ball lending button 62. In contrast, in the 12th modified example, after the game has been controlled to be unplayable, ball lending is not executed even when the player or the like presses the ball lending button 62 (operation means).

The twelfth variant differs from the above-mentioned embodiments and variants in the following respects. Specifically, in the twelfth variant, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines during error processing (S111) that there is an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality), it sets the game stop flag to ON. This disables gameplay. However, as mentioned above, the game stop flag does not switch from ON to OFF simply by powering the machine back on (turning the power OFF and ON); it switches from ON to OFF when a RAM clear is executed. Thus, in the twelfth variant, if illegal magnetism is detected, the game can be restored to a state in which gameplay is possible, provided that the game stop flag is set to ON and a RAM clear is executed, just as when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated. The main timer interrupt processing (S005) of the twelfth variant is described below.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] As shown in Figure 77, in the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the 12th modified example, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). As mentioned above, the game stop flag is turned ON when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated or when illegal magnetism is detected. Thus, if the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is executed as mentioned above. Note that "the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more" or "it is determined that illegal magnetism (specific abnormality) exists" corresponds to "the specified stop condition being met."

On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), steps S102 to S113 are skipped, and game play is disabled. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 executes ball lending control stop processing (S115) and proceeds to step S114. In the ball lending control stop processing (S115), the game control microcomputer 101 sends a ball lending stop command to the payout control board 170. As a result, when the payout control board 170 receives the ball lending stop command from the main control board 100, the payout control microcomputer 171 controls the lending of game balls to be disabled based on the ball lending stop command. As a result, even if a player or the like presses the ball lending button 62, ball lending will not be executed. Note that the state in which ball lending is disabled will continue as long as game play is controlled to be disabled (as long as the game stop flag is ON). Therefore, if the RAM is subsequently cleared and the game returns to a state where it can be played (the game stop flag is turned OFF), ball lending will return to a state where it can be played.

Furthermore, upon receiving the ball lending stop command, the payout control microcomputer 171 sends a ball lending stop signal to the balance display board 172. As a result, the balance display board 172 alternates every three seconds between displaying a number corresponding to the number of game balls that were available for lending before the game was controlled to be unplayable, as shown in Figure 78 (A), and displaying "E," indicating that ball lending is unplayable, as shown in Figure 78 (B). In this way, players who see "E," indicating that ball lending is unplayable, on the balance display unit 61 can be made aware that ball lending is unplayable.

Furthermore, in the ball lending control stop process (S115) shown in Figure 77, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a ball lending unavailable display command to the display control board 120. As a result, when the display control board 120 receives the ball lending unavailable display command from the main control board 100, the display control microcomputer 121 executes a ball lending unavailable notification display that notifies players that ball lending is unavailable. Here, we will explain separately the ball lending unavailable notification display when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the ball lending unavailable notification display when unauthorized magnetism is detected.

Figure 79 (A) shows the ball lending unavailable notification effect when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. As shown in Figure 79 (A), a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Additionally, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. At this time, as a ball lending unavailable notification effect, a ball lending unavailable notification image TK indicating "Ball lending unavailable" is displayed on the display screen 50a. In this way, the display of the ball lending unavailable notification image TK can strongly remind players who are unable to play due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function that ball lending is unavailable. In addition, in conjunction with the ball lending unavailable notification effect, a card removal prompt effect is executed on the display screen 50a. In the card removal prompt effect, a card removal prompt image TB indicating "Please press the return button to remove your card" is displayed. This allows the player to be prompted to press the return button 63 and remove from the card unit CU a card containing information about the number of game balls that were available for loan before the game was disabled.

Figure 79(B) shows a ball lending unavailable notification effect when an illegal magnetic field is detected. As shown in Figure 79(B), a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a. A game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. At this time, the ball lending unavailable notification effect is executed, as in the case shown in Figure 79(A). In this way, the display of the ball lending unavailable notification image TK makes it clear to players who are unable to play due to the detection of illegal magnetic field that ball lending is unavailable. Also, as in the case shown in Figure 79(A), a card removal prompt effect is executed. This encourages the player to press the return button 63 to remove from the card unit CU the card containing information on the number of game balls that were available for loan before the game was disabled.

In this twelfth variant, if the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, the player cannot continue playing. If the player were to press the ball lending button 62 at this time and lend a game ball, the player who is unable to play would end up with unnecessary balls and would suffer a loss. Therefore, by preventing the lending of game balls even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed after the game has become impossible to play, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player would suffer a loss.

In addition, in the 12th variant, if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated based on the difference in the number of balls exceeding 80,000, game play is disabled. In this case, the player is unable to continue playing and will discontinue play and leave the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Here, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, RAM must be cleared to restore play, so the gaming parlor staff will leave the game disabled for a while (basically on the day the over-prize ball prevention function is activated). As a result, there is a risk that another player who is unaware that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated will press the ball loan button 62 on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and attempt to start play. Therefore, in this 12th variant, by preventing the loan of game balls even when the ball loan button 62 is pressed, it is possible to prevent a player who is not fully aware of the over-prize ball prevention function from incurring losses.

In particular, with popular pachinko gaming machines, players often press the ball lending button 62, reserve the pachinko gaming machine (reserve the machine) with a certain number of gaming balls stored in the upper tray 34, and then go look for another pachinko gaming machine. Under these circumstances, there is a risk that a player may press the ball lending button 62 on a pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose over-prize ball prevention function has been activated in an attempt to reserve the machine. Therefore, in this twelfth variant, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed, gaming balls are not loaned, making it possible to prevent the machine from being reserved in advance.

In addition, in the 12th variant, if unauthorized magnetism is detected, the game is disabled. In this case, a RAM clear is required to return the game to a state where it can be played, and the arcade staff may not clear the RAM for some time. In this case, there is a risk that a player who is unaware that the game cannot be played on this pachinko game machine PY1 may press the ball loan button 62 and attempt to start playing. Therefore, in this 12th variant, by preventing the loan of game balls even when the ball loan button 62 is pressed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who is unaware that the game cannot be played suffers a loss.

In addition, in the twelfth variant, as shown in Figure 1, the balance display unit 61 (notification means) indicates that ball lending is possible by displaying a number (100) corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent. Here, when game play is controlled so that it cannot be played, the balance display unit 61 indicates that ball lending is not possible by displaying "E" as shown in Figure 78 (B). In this way, by showing the "E" on the balance display unit 61, which indicates that ball lending is not possible, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that ball lending will not be performed.

<Thirteenth Modification>
In the eleventh modified example, only the employees of the gaming parlor were able to set the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notice display and the residual ball number notification display. In contrast, the thirteenth modified example is configured so that the player can set the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notice display and the residual ball number notification display. Specifically, in the thirteenth modified example, the player can set the above-mentioned display items while in the customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. Below, with reference to Figure 80, we will explain the case where the player sets the above-mentioned display items.

As shown in Figure 80(A), when the machine is in the waiting state for customers, the display screen 50a can display a settings screen G101 for configuring settings related to the effects of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 as a waiting-for-customer effect. As mentioned above, the settings screen G101 is displayed when the normal button 40 is pressed while the waiting-for-customer demo video G100 shown in Figure 18(A-1) is being displayed. While the settings screen G101 shown in Figure 80(A) is displayed, if the player moves the cursor to "Effect Settings" and presses the normal button 40, a effect setting image FX is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in Figure 80(B). This effect setting image FX is the same image as the initial function setting image FS (see Figure 75(B)) described in the 11th modified example.

Therefore, while the effect setting image FX shown in FIG. 80(B) is displayed, the player can move the cursor to the item indicating "Switch to setting screen" in "Over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting" and press the normal button 40 to display the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 80(C). Then, while this over-prize ball abnormality notification effect setting image SX is displayed, the player can set the effect details related to the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. On the other hand, while the effect setting image FX shown in FIG. 80(B) is displayed, the player can move the cursor to the item indicating "Switch to setting screen" in "Residual ball number notification effect setting" and press the normal button 40 to display the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 80(D). Then, while this residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is displayed, the player can set the effect details related to the residual ball number notification effect.

In this 13th variant, while in the waiting state for customers, the player can set the performance details related to the abnormal over-prize ball notification performance and the residual ball number notification performance by operating the normal button 40 and select button while the abnormal over-prize ball notification performance setting image SX or the residual ball number notification performance setting image SY is displayed. In particular, the difference in the number of balls that will trigger the abnormal over-prize ball notification performance can be set as desired. In this way, the player can optimally adjust the execution timing of the abnormal over-prize ball notification performance as needed.

In addition, in the 13th variant, the player can set whether or not to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect as a performance item related to the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. Therefore, if the player does not want the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect to be executed, they can prevent the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect from being executed. In this way, the player can adjust whether or not to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect at their own discretion.

<Fourteenth Modification>
In the tenth modification, if the difference in ball count is 79,550 or more, an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed, followed by a residual ball count notification effect (see FIG. 73). In contrast, in the fourteenth modification, as shown in FIG. 81, if the difference in ball count is 79,550 or more, an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed, followed by a current differential ball count indication effect. In the fourteenth modification, as in the tenth modification, the types of jackpots that can be won include jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, and jackpot symbol Z2 (see FIGS. 69 and 70). Furthermore, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, disabling gameplay. The following focuses on the differences from the tenth modification.

In this 14th variant, as shown in Figure 81, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed. Then, when the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect ends, the current difference in the number of balls indication effect begins. Note that the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect and current difference in the number of balls indication effect are executed when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played, but they may also be executed when a jackpot game is being played and the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,550 or more.

As will be described later, the current ball difference indication effect is an effect that indicates to the player the current difference in the number of balls. However, the current ball difference indication effect does not always correctly notify the player of the difference in the number of balls counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101, but rather merely allows the player to grasp the current difference in the number of balls, which serves as a guideline. Therefore, in the 14th variant, the current ball difference adjustment effect, which will be described later, is executed so that the player can correctly grasp the current difference in the number of balls. Then, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, at the end of the jackpot game, the game stop notice effect, which will be described later, is executed, and as the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unplayable.

Next, an example of the presentation of the 14th variant will be explained based on Figure 82. As a prerequisite, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the difference in the number of balls is slightly less than 79,550. At this time, as shown in Figure 82 (A), the display screen 50a displays a prize ball count image G110 showing "1200 pt" and a round background image G114. Then, suppose that a game ball enters the first jackpot opening 14, and the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more.

At this time, as shown in Figure 82 (B), an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed on the display screen 50a. In the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect of the 14th variant, an over-prize ball abnormality notification image ZJ is displayed indicating "Current difference in number of balls: 79,550 Difference in number of balls: 80,000, over-prize ball abnormality." This allows the player to understand in advance that the current difference in number of balls is 79,550, and that if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, the game will become unplayable. This over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed for only approximately 5 seconds (the specified number of seconds), and when the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect ends, the current difference in number of balls suggestion effect begins.

As described above, the current ball difference indication effect (specific measurement number indication effect) is an effect that indicates the current difference in balls to the player, and is designed to continue to be executed until the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (until game play is disabled). Specifically, when a game ball enters the first large prize entry port 14 and the difference in balls becomes 79,565, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a prize ball number image G110 showing "1,215 points" is displayed, and a current ball difference indication image ZT showing "difference in balls 79,565" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a as a current ball difference indication effect. Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first large prize entry port 14 and the difference in balls becomes 79,580, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a prize ball number image G110 showing "1,230 points" is displayed, and a current ball difference indication image ZT showing "difference in balls 79,580" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a as a current ball difference indication effect. In this way, the current difference in ball numbers indication allows players to know at any time what the current difference in ball numbers is.

As mentioned above, the current difference in ball numbers indication effect of the 14th variant does not always correctly indicate the difference in ball numbers counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101, and the reason for this will be explained below. Note that hereafter, the difference in ball numbers counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101 will be referred to as the "actual difference in ball numbers." The difference in ball numbers is the difference between the total number of winning balls and the total number of shot balls, and so is subtracted each time the player shoots a game ball. For this reason, if the current difference in ball numbers indication effect were to subtract and display the number indicating the difference in ball numbers each time a game ball was shot, the number of difference in ball numbers would be frequently updated (subtracted) and displayed, which could be annoying to the player.

So, in the 14th variant, when the actual difference in balls is subtracted in the current difference in balls indication effect, the subtracted actual difference in balls number is not displayed, but rather the actual difference in balls number before the subtraction is displayed as is. In other words, the number shown in the current difference in balls indication effect is not subtracted even if the player fires a game ball. In this way, in the current difference in balls indication effect, the displayed number changes (increases) only when the actual difference in balls increases, making it possible to prevent the difference in balls number from being frequently updated and displayed.

Here, in the current difference in balls suggestion effect, even if the actual difference in balls is subtracted, the number displayed does not change, so the more game balls are fired, the greater the difference (deviation) between the actual difference in balls and the displayed number. Therefore, in the 14th variant, a current difference in balls adjustment effect is executed to eliminate the difference between the actual difference in balls and the displayed number. In other words, by executing the current difference in balls adjustment effect, the number shown in the current difference in balls suggestion effect is displayed correctly as the actual difference in balls. In this way, even if the correct difference in balls number is not displayed in the current difference in balls suggestion effect, the current difference in balls adjustment effect is executed, allowing the player to correctly understand the current difference in balls.

In the 14th variant, after the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed, when the jackpot game ends, a current ball difference adjustment effect is executed at the end of the ending, in other words, at the start of the transitioning game state. Also, when the jackpot game starts after the excessive ball abnormality notification effect is executed, a current ball difference adjustment effect is executed at the start of the opening. In this way, the player is allowed to correctly grasp the current difference in balls at the start and end of the jackpot game. Also, in the 14th variant, after the actual difference in balls reaches 80,000 or more, a current ball difference adjustment effect is executed at the ending before the jackpot game state ends. This current ball difference adjustment effect allows the player to correctly grasp the current difference in balls just before the game stops.

Returning to the explanation of the presentation example of the 14th variant example, as shown in Figure 82 (D), after a current difference in balls suggestion image ZT showing a difference in balls of 79,580 is displayed in the current difference in balls suggestion presentation, the round of play ends and the ending begins. As a result, as shown in Figure 83 (A), an ending image G111 suggesting the special mode is displayed on the display screen 50a. Also, at this time, although the actual difference in balls is 79,870, a current difference in balls suggestion image ZT showing a difference in balls of 79,895 is displayed as the current difference in balls suggestion presentation.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends and the game transitions to a high-probability, high-base state, the display screen 50a executes a current ball difference adjustment effect, as shown in Figure 83 (B). Specifically, a ball difference adjustment image ST showing the words "ball difference adjustment" is displayed, along with a current ball difference suggestion image ZT showing "79,870 balls." In this way, the current ball difference adjustment effect switches the number shown in the current ball difference suggestion image ZT from "79,895" to "79,870." In other words, the number of game balls fired by the player during the jackpot game after the current ball difference suggestion effect began is subtracted. This allows the player to correctly understand the current number of balls difference when the jackpot game ends.

As shown in Figure 83 (C), in the high probability, high base state, the background image G105 for the probability variation is displayed. Also, at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a current ball difference indication effect is being executed, and when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12 (electric chute 12D), a changing display of the effect pattern EZ is executed. Here, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12, one prize ball is awarded, and the number shown in the current ball difference indication image ZT changes from "79870" to "79871." However, even though a gaming ball has been released, the number shown in the current ball difference indication image ZT is not subtracted.

In this way, even in a high-probability, high-base state, the number shown in the current ball difference suggestion effect increases only when the actual number of balls increases, and is not subtracted when the actual number of balls decreases. This prevents the number of balls being frequently updated and displayed, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming overly conscious of the number of balls difference. In other words, in a game state where the base (the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired) is less than 1, such as a high-probability, high-base state, the number of balls difference basically decreases as the game progresses. In this case, if the number showing the actual number of balls difference was always displayed accurately, there is a risk that the player would become overly conscious of the number of balls difference, which decreases as the game progresses. Therefore, in the fourteenth variant, when the actual number of balls difference decreases, the number shown in the current ball difference suggestion effect does not decrease, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming overly conscious of the decrease in the number of balls difference, which is essentially the decrease in the base.

Then, as the game progresses, the SP Reach is initiated by the drawing of Special Chart 2. At this time, as shown in Figure 83 (D), the display screen 50a displays the SP Reach background image G113 as a special effect for the SP Reach. Also at this time, the current ball difference suggestion image ZT showing "difference in balls 79,890" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. Note that even though the player fires several game balls during the execution of the SP Reach, the current ball difference suggestion image ZT continues to show "difference in balls 79,890."

Then, because the special chart variation pattern is "SP jackpot variation," as shown in Figure 84 (A), the main character is displayed celebrating his victory in the battle, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a stopping pattern ("555") suggesting a jackpot. This notifies the player that he has won a jackpot. Note that when the variation effect ends, although the current ball difference suggestion image ZT shows "difference in balls 79,890," the actual difference in balls is 79,212.

Next, when the jackpot game begins, the current ball difference adjustment effect is executed, as shown in Figure 84 (B). Specifically, the ball difference adjustment image ST is displayed, and the current ball difference suggestion image ZT showing "79,212 balls difference" is also displayed. In this way, the current ball difference adjustment effect switches the number shown in the current ball difference suggestion image ZT from "79,890" to "79,212," subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player in the high-probability, high-base state. This makes it possible for the player to correctly understand the current number of balls difference when the jackpot game begins.

Next, as an opening effect, a bonus acquisition image BK indicating "BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in Figure 84 (C). Then, when the opening ends and the round of play begins, a round background image G114 is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in Figure 84 (D), and as a game ball enters the first large prize slot 14, a prize ball count image G110 indicating "15pt" is displayed. At this time, as a current ball difference indication effect, a current ball difference indication image ZT indicating "difference in balls 79227" is also displayed. In this way, the increase in the number indicated in the prize ball count image G110 and the increase in the number indicated in the current ball difference indication image ZT are the same, so the player does not have to be aware of the number of game balls that have been released.

As the round of play progresses, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the display screen 50a displays a round image G109 indicating "Round 6" and a prize ball count image G110 indicating "765 points." At this time, a current ball difference indication image ZT indicating "79,989 ball difference" is also displayed. Next, when the game ball enters the first large prize slot 14, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a prize ball count image G110 indicating "780 points" and a current ball difference indication image ZT indicating "80,004 ball difference" are displayed. Here, when the number displayed in the current ball difference indication image ZT becomes 80,000 or greater, the frame surrounding the number changes to a thick red line. This makes the player more aware that the number displayed in the current ball difference indication image ZT is 80,000 or greater. Please note that even if the number shown in the current ball difference indication image ZT is 80,000 or more, it does not reflect the number of game balls fired by the player, so it does not confirm that the actual ball difference is 80,000 or more.

Next, as the round game progresses, just before the round game ends, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a round image G109 indicating "Round 10" and a prize ball count image G110 indicating "1500 points" are displayed. At this time, a current ball difference indication image ZT indicating "difference in balls 80,712" is also displayed. Here, it is assumed that the actual difference in balls is 80,000 or more when the round game ends. In this case, when the ending starts, a current ball difference adjustment effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 84(D). Note that if the actual difference in balls is less than 80,000 when the round game ends, the current ball difference adjustment effect is not executed, and instead, the current ball difference adjustment effect is executed when the jackpot game (ending) ends, as described above. Thus, in the 14th variant, the current ball difference adjustment effect is executed when the ending of the jackpot game starts only if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 81).

As shown in Figure 85 (D), in the current difference in balls adjustment effect, the difference in balls adjustment image ST is displayed, along with a current difference in balls suggestion image ZT showing "difference in balls 80602." In this way, the current difference in balls suggestion image ZT after the current difference in balls adjustment effect has been executed shows that the difference in balls is 80,000 or more. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the actual difference in balls is 80,000 or more and that the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated.

Next, at the ending, as shown in Figure 86 (A), a game stop notice effect is executed on the display screen 50a. In other words, in a situation where the excess prize ball prevention function is activated when the jackpot game ends, the ending image G111 (see Figure 18 (C-3)), which suggests the presentation mode that will be set after the jackpot game, is not displayed, and the game stop notice effect is executed. Specifically, in the game stop notice effect, a game stop notice image YT displaying the words "Game will be stopped soon" is displayed. This makes it possible to strongly remind the player that once the ending ends, the game will no longer be playable. Even at this time, the current ball difference suggestion image ZT, which indicates "difference in balls 80,612", is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game is disabled. At this time, as shown in Figure 86 (B), the display screen 50a displays a red background image RE and an error release method image ERX indicating "Error X Excess prize ball abnormality Please clear RAM." In addition, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 light up in white, and all board lamps 54 are turned off. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the game is no longer playable.

In this 14th variant, after the current difference in balls indication effect has begun, if the actual difference in balls falls below 78,500 (the lower limit for the effect), the current difference in balls indication image ZT will no longer be displayed (the current difference in balls indication effect will no longer be executed). This is because, by the time the difference in balls reaches 80,000 or more, more prize balls will be required than the number of prize balls (1,500) for the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z1) that can award the most prize balls in a single jackpot game. In other words, after the next jackpot game ends, the current difference in balls indication effect is not executed, taking into account that the excessive prize ball prevention function will not be activated. This makes it possible to prevent the current difference in balls indication effect from continuing to be executed even when the difference in balls is well below 80,000, thereby preventing the player from becoming overly conscious of the difference in balls. Note that while the actual difference in balls (lower limit for the effect) that triggers the current difference in balls indication effect to no longer be executed is set to less than 78,500, it can also be set to another number (e.g., 78,000) and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth variant, after the current difference in balls indication effect has started, the current difference in balls indication effect is only executed in the jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state), the high probability high base state (advantageous gaming state), and the low probability high base state (advantageous gaming state). In other words, the current difference in balls indication effect is not executed in the normal gaming state. This is because, after transitioning to the normal gaming state when the actual difference in balls is 80,000 or less, the possibility of the actual difference in balls becoming 80,000 or more in that normal gaming state is extremely low, and it is preferable not to make the player pay attention to the difference in balls number in the normal gaming state. In this way, even if the current difference in balls indication effect has started in the jackpot gaming state, if the game then transitions to the normal gaming state, the current difference in balls indication effect will not be executed. This makes it possible to avoid making the player pay attention to the difference in balls number in the normal gaming state.

As explained in detail above, in the 14th variant, when the actual difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more, a current ball difference suggestion effect is executed, suggesting the number of balls difference, as shown in Figure 82 (C). This makes it possible for the player to understand how close they are to a situation where they will no longer be able to play, i.e., the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function. Also, if the actual difference in the number of balls increases while the current ball difference suggestion effect is being executed, the number shown increases, whereas if the actual difference in the number of balls decreases while the current ball difference suggestion effect is being executed, the number shown does not decrease. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the number of balls difference only when the actual difference in the number of balls is increasing. In other words, by not showing the number of balls difference increasing or decreasing frequently, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming overly conscious of the number of balls difference.

In addition, in the fourteenth variant, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in Figure 83 (B), a current difference in the number of balls adjustment effect is executed, and the number shown in the current difference in the number of balls indication image ZT is corrected to match the actual difference in the number of balls. Also, when the jackpot game starts, as shown in Figure 84 (B), a current difference in the number of balls adjustment effect is executed, and the number shown in the current difference in the number of balls indication image ZT is corrected to match the actual difference in the number of balls. In this way, even if the difference between the actual difference in the number of balls and the number shown in the current difference in the number of balls indication image ZT becomes large, the player can be made to understand the correct difference in the number of balls when the jackpot game starts or ends.

<Fifteenth Modification>
In the above-mentioned 14th modified example, when the game is controlled to be unplayable (when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated), the error release method image ERX is simply displayed as shown in Fig. 86(B), and the player is not involved in the presentation. In contrast, in the 15th modified example, when the game is controlled to be unplayable, a character input presentation is executed, allowing the player to participate in the presentation.

In the fifteenth variant, when game play is controlled to be unplayable, an achievement effect is executed. The achievement effect, as shown in Figure 87(B), is an effect to celebrate when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. Specifically, the achievement effect displays an achievement image OF showing the words "Congratulations on reaching 80,000 shots" and a happy character. This achievement image OF can be said to be an achievement image suggesting that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. This achievement effect gives the player a sense of accomplishment for having created the extremely rare situation of a difference in the number of balls of 80,000 or more, and can give the player a positive impression. In other words, by displaying the achievement image OF shown in Figure 87(B) instead of the error release method image ERX shown in Figure 86(B), it is possible to reduce the negative impression that game play will no longer be playable.

While the achievement effect shown in Figure 87 (B) is being executed, an input switching image NK is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 50a. The input switching image NK is an image that prompts the user to press the normal button 40 to display the character input image MG, which will be described later. Specifically, the input switching image NK shows the shape of the normal button 40 and the words "Switch to character input screen." Therefore, when the normal button 40 is pressed while the input switching image NK is displayed, the character input image MG is displayed as a character input effect, as shown in Figure 87 (C).

The character input image MG shown in Figure 87 (C) displays a "Character currently being input" column, each character that can be input from "a" to "no," a "Character switch" column, a "Delete" column, a "Confirm" column, and an "End" column. While the character input image MG is displayed, using the select button to position the cursor over the "Character switch" column and pressing the normal button 40 switches the displayed characters. The types of characters that can be switched are hiragana, katakana, Roman letters, and numbers. While the character input image MG is displayed, using the select button to position the cursor over the "Delete" column and pressing the normal button 40 deletes one character (the rightmost character) displayed in the "Character currently being input" column. While the character input image MG is displayed, using the select button to select one of the displayed characters, using the select button to position the cursor over the "Confirm" column, and pressing the normal button 40 deletes the selected character in the "Character currently being input" column. Additionally, while the character input image MG is displayed, if you use the select button to move the cursor to the "End" field and press the normal button 40, the display of the character input image MG will end and the display will return to the achievement image OF.

In this way, in the character input effect, the player can input any character by operating the select button and normal button 40. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 can accept any character selected by the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 87(D), when the display switches from the character input image MG to the achievement image OF, an input reflection image NP is displayed, showing the character input by the player (the character displayed in the "Character being input" column of the character input image MG). In this way, after the game is controlled to be unplayable (after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated), the player can display any character selected by the player on the display screen 50a.

Next, an example of the presentation of the 15th variant will be explained based on Figure 87. As a prerequisite, the actual difference in the number of balls is 80,602, and the jackpot game is ending. In this case, as shown in Figure 87 (A), a game stop notice image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a as a game stop notice presentation. In addition, a current difference in the number of balls suggestion image ZT indicating "difference in the number of balls 80,612" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game is controlled so that it cannot be played. At this time, as shown in Figure 87 (B), the achievement image OF is displayed as the achievement effect. At this time, an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is an effect that makes the player understand that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, in other words, that the game has been controlled so that it cannot be played; specifically, an over-prize ball abnormality notification image KF showing the words "over-prize ball abnormality" is displayed. In this way, even when the achievement effect is executed, the over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed, making the player aware that the game cannot be played.

As shown in Figure 87 (B), while the achievement effect is being executed, an input switching image NK is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 50a. When the player presses the normal button 40, a character input image MG is displayed as a character input effect, as shown in Figure 87 (C). At this time, the player operates the select button and normal button 40 (predetermined operation means) to cause the effect control microcomputer 121 to accept the character information "CLEAR BY TAROU." As a result, "CLEAR BY TAROU" is displayed in the "Characters being input" column. After that, while the character input image MG is displayed, the player uses the select button to position the cursor in the "END" column and presses the normal button 40.

As a result, as shown in Figure 87 (D), the achievement image OF is displayed, and an input reflection image NP showing the words "Clear by Taro" is also displayed. As a result, the player can display the input reflection image NP showing the words "Clear by Taro" that he or she has selected, along with the achievement image OF and the excessive ball abnormality notification image KF. At this time, the player can take a photo of the achievement image OF, excessive ball abnormality notification image KF, and input reflection image NP using a mobile phone camera, etc., and show the photo to friends or upload the photo to the Internet to brag about it. In other words, by displaying the characters selected by the player along with the achievement image OF and excessive ball abnormality notification image KF, the player can create evidence that he or she has reached the extremely rare situation of a difference in the number of balls of 80,000 or more. The display of the input reflection image NP corresponds to a "special operation effect."

Here, when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 stores activation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated in a non-erasable memory area (not shown) of the presentation RAM 124. Furthermore, the presentation control microcomputer 121 stores character information received through the character input effect (for example, the character information "Clear by Taro" mentioned above) in a non-erasable memory area (not shown) of the presentation RAM 124. The non-erasable memory area is a memory area of the presentation RAM 124 in which stored information will not be erased by the presentation CPU 122 even if a RAM clear is executed. Therefore, after the activation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated and the character information received through the character input effect are stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124, they will not be erased even if a RAM clear is executed. In other words, after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated and game play is disabled, the activation information indicating that the prize ball prevention function has been activated and the text information entered by the player remain stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124, even if the control that disables game play is subsequently released by clearing the RAM.

Here, the excessive ball abnormal operation history effect in the 15th variant will be explained based on Figure 88. As a prerequisite, as described above, after the excessive ball prevention function is activated, the player inputs the text information "CLEAR BY TAROU" using the text input effect. As a result, the text information "CLEAR BY TAROU" is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, along with operation information indicating that the excessive ball prevention function has been activated. Then, after the power is cut off, the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, and the customer waiting effect is executed. Furthermore, while this customer waiting effect is being executed, the player presses the normal button 40 while the customer waiting demo video G100 (see Figure 18 (A-1)) is being displayed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 88(A), the post-activation setting screen G201 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The post-activation setting screen G201 includes a field for setting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52, a field for setting the brightness of the display screen 50a ("Light Intensity Setting"), a field for setting the frequency of the effects to be executed ("Effect Settings"), and a field for the abnormal operation history of excessive prize balls. Thus, in the fifteenth variant, if activation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the setting screen G101 shown in FIG. 18(A-2) is not displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect, and instead the post-activation setting screen G201 is displayed. This allows a player who views the field for the abnormal operation history of excessive prize balls on the post-activation setting screen G201 to understand that the pachinko machine has previously activated the excessive prize ball prevention function. As a result, the player is given the impression that the pachinko machine is capable of awarding an extremely large number of prize balls, which can increase their motivation to play.

Then, while the post-activation setting screen G201 is displayed, the player uses the select button to position the cursor on the "Over-prize ball abnormal activation history" field and presses the normal button 40. In this case, as shown in Figure 88 (B), the display screen 50a displays the achievement image OF as the achievement effect. At this time, the over-prize ball abnormal notification image KF is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a as the over-prize ball abnormal notification effect. Furthermore, the input reflection image NP showing the words "Clear by Taro" is displayed.

Thus, in the fifteenth variant, if the text information "Clear by Taro" is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124, an input reflection image NP is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, showing the characters selected by the player when the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. As a result, even if the RAM is cleared, the player who activated the over-prize ball prevention function can be given the benefit of a message that remains as evidence that the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Note that, as shown in FIG. 88(B), even if the achievement image OF is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, the input switching image NK is not displayed, unlike when the achievement image OF is displayed immediately after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In other words, because the text input presentation (see FIG. 87(C)) is not executed during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, the characters shown in the input reflection image NP are a benefit only for the player who activated the over-prize ball prevention function.

As explained in detail above, in the fifteenth variant, the game is disabled when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. After the game is disabled, the player can input any character by operating the normal button 40 and the select button, as shown in Figure 87 (C). This causes the input reflection image NP showing the words "Clear by Taro" to be displayed (a special operation effect is executed), as shown in Figure 87 (D). In this way, the player can continue to enjoy the game even after it has become disabled. In particular, it is possible to give the player a special sense of accomplishment by displaying any character to commemorate the difference in the number of balls reaching 80,000 or more.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth variant, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, as shown in Figure 87 (D), an input reflection image NP showing the characters entered by the player is displayed along with an achievement image OF indicating that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000 or more. This allows the player to see the achievement image OF and the characters they have entered, giving them a great sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in the fifteenth variant, after the game is disabled, the power is cut off. Then, based on the RAM clear switch 191 being pressed when the power is turned on, a RAM clear is executed (the game information is erased). However, even when a RAM clear is executed, the text information stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124 (for example, the text information "Clear by Taro") is not erased. As a result, even after the power is turned on after the game is disabled, it is possible to display the text entered by the player who achieved a difference of 80,000 balls or more as a commemorative item, as shown in Figure 88 (B).

<16th Modification>
In the above-mentioned fifteenth modified example, after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, by looking at the over-prize ball abnormal operation history on the post-activation setting screen G201 shown in FIG. 88 (A), it is possible to determine that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously activated the over-prize ball prevention function. In contrast, in the sixteenth modified example, by looking at the after-excess ball abnormal operation effects shown below, it is possible to determine that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously activated the over-prize ball prevention function. The after-excess ball abnormal operation effects (special effects) are effects that are not executed if the over-prize ball prevention function has never been activated, but are executed only when the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated. In the sixteenth modified example, the after-excess ball abnormal operation effects include a special SP reach (see FIG. 89 (B)), a special cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2)), a special opening effect (see FIG. 91 (B-2) (C-2)), and a special customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2)), which will be explained in order below.

First, referring to Figure 89, we will explain the case where a special SP reach (special reach effect) is executed. The special SP reach is one of the SP reaches (reach effects) that make the player hope for a jackpot, and may be executed only after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. In other words, if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 will not execute a special SP reach, but if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a special SP reach. The special SP reach of the 16th variant can be executed only if a jackpot is determined in the lottery for the special symbol. In other words, if a special SP reach is executed, no loss is announced, and the special SP reach is an effect that indicates that a jackpot has been confirmed.

When a special SP reach is executed, after an N reach, as shown in FIG. 89(A), an SP reach background image G113 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and an SP reach start title image G1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a special battle image G123 is displayed on the display screen 50a, depicting a battle between a main character with a rainbow-colored effect and an enemy character. Here, in the case of a normal SP reach, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the main character does not have a rainbow-colored effect, but in the case of a special SP reach, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the main character has a rainbow-colored effect. Therefore, by showing the main character with a rainbow-colored effect to the player, it is clearly indicated that a special SP reach, rather than a normal SP reach, is being executed. The normal SP reach shown in FIG. 21 can be executed not only before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

When the special SP reach reaches its final stage, a special battle victory image G124 is displayed on the display screen 50a, depicting the main character with a rainbow effect celebrating his victory in the battle, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state (a so-called double number) that suggests a jackpot. In other words, when the special SP reach is executed, the main character will not be defeated in battle, and a jackpot win is guaranteed. In this way, a player who has recognized the special SP reach can be made to understand that they have won a jackpot, and can also be made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously activated its excessive prize ball prevention function. As a result, they can be made to recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and can build up great expectations for the subsequent rush (consecutive wins).

Next, referring to Figure 90, we will explain when a special cut-in preview effect is executed. Preview effects can be said to be effects that suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed, using the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, buttons 40, 41, etc. These preview effects include cut-in preview effects in which a cut-in image is temporarily inserted into the effect currently being executed on the display screen 50a. These cut-in preview effects are further divided into normal cut-in preview effects and special cut-in preview effects.

When a normal cut-in preview effect is executed, as shown in Figure 90(A), for example, while the display patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changing, a normal cut-in preview image XY is temporarily displayed as shown in Figure 90(B-1). The normal cut-in preview image XY shows the profile of the transformed main character, indicating that the expected probability of winning the jackpot is 30%. Therefore, the normal cut-in preview effect does not indicate that a jackpot has been confirmed, and after the normal cut-in rehearsal effect is executed, either a win or a loss of the jackpot may be announced. Furthermore, this normal cut-in preview effect may be executed not only before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

In contrast, the special cut-in preview effect (special preview effect) may only be executed after the power is turned on after the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated. In other words, if operation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 will not execute the special cut-in preview effect, and if operation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special cut-in preview effect. The special cut-in preview effect of the 16th variant can only be executed if the special pattern lottery determines that a jackpot has been won. In other words, if the special cut-in preview effect is executed, no loss will be announced, and the special cut-in preview effect is an effect that indicates that a jackpot has been confirmed.

When a special cut-in preview effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 90(A), for example, while the display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is changing, a special cut-in preview image XZ is temporarily displayed as shown in FIG. 90(B-2). The special cut-in preview image XZ shows the main character's profile, but unlike the normal cut-in preview image XY shown in FIG. 90(B-1), the main character's profile is accented with a rainbow-colored effect. By showing the main character's profile accented with a rainbow-colored effect to the player, it is clearly indicated that a special cut-in preview effect is being executed, rather than a normal cut-in preview effect. After this special cut-in preview effect is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state (a double number) that indicates a jackpot. Therefore, a player who recognizes the special cut-in preview effect can immediately recognize that they have won a jackpot, and can also recognize that the pachinko machine has previously activated its over-prize ball prevention function. As a result, players are made to realize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, creating great expectations for the subsequent rush (consecutive wins).

Next, we will explain the case where a special opening effect is executed, based on Figure 91. An opening effect is an effect that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and the opening effects in the 16th variant include a normal opening effect and a special opening effect.

When a normal opening effect is executed, as shown in Figure 91 (A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state suggesting a jackpot, followed by the display of a normal bonus image TV displaying the words "LOGO BONUS" as shown in Figure 91 (B-1). The display of this normal bonus image TV allows the player to understand that a normal opening effect is being executed. Furthermore, in the case of a normal opening effect, a normal opening image TC is displayed, showing the transformed protagonist character, as shown in Figure 91 (C-1). This normal opening effect is executed regardless of whether a V-long jackpot, which effectively achieves a high-probability state after a jackpot game, or a V-short jackpot (see Figure 70), which does not achieve a high-probability state after a jackpot game, is executed. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a normal opening effect regardless of whether the jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, or jackpot symbol Z2 is displayed. This normal opening effect can be performed not only before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

In contrast, the special opening effect (special winning effect) may only be executed after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. In other words, if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 will not execute the special opening effect, but if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special opening effect. The special opening effect of the 16th variant can only be executed if a V-long jackpot (jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Z1) is won, which essentially establishes a high probability state after a jackpot game. In other words, if the special opening effect is executed, it is an effect that indicates that a transition to a high probability state is essentially confirmed as long as the game is being played correctly.

When a special opening effect is executed, as shown in Figure 91 (A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner that suggests a jackpot, and then a special bonus image SB showing the words "Special Logo Bonus" is displayed, as shown in Figure 91 (B-2). The display of this special bonus image SB allows the player to understand that a special opening effect is being executed. Then, in the case of a special opening effect, a special opening image SC is displayed, in which the transformed main character appears with a rainbow-colored effect, as shown in Figure 91 (C-2).

In this way, players who understand the special opening effect can understand that winning a V-long jackpot will allow them to transition to a high-probability state after winning the jackpot, and can also understand that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously had the over-prize ball prevention function activated. As a result, players can recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, creating great expectations for the subsequent rush (consecutive wins). Note that even if the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated and a V-long jackpot (jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Z1) is won, the special opening effect will not necessarily be executed; it is set to be executed extremely rarely (at an allocation rate of about 5%). In this way, the rarity value of the special opening effect is increased, and it is possible to give players who see the special opening effect a great sense of exhilaration.

Next, based on Figure 92, we will explain the case where a special customer waiting demo effect is executed. The customer waiting demo effect is part of a customer waiting effect that indicates that a variable effect is not being executed. In other words, in the customer waiting effect, if the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 remain stationary for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the effect transitions to the customer waiting demo effect. Note that in the 16th variant, if the player presses the normal button 40 while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the post-activation setting screen G201 shown in Figure 88 (A) is not displayed, and instead the setting screen G101 shown in Figure 18 (A-1) is displayed. The customer waiting demo effects of the 16th variant include a normal customer waiting demo effect and a special customer waiting demo effect.

When the normal customer waiting demo effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed frozen for, for example, 30 seconds, and then the normal customer waiting demo video TD is displayed, as shown in FIG. 92(B-1), in which the transformed protagonist character fights an enemy character. The display of this normal customer waiting demo video TD allows the player to understand that the normal customer waiting demo effect is being executed. Then, when the normal customer waiting demo video TD ends, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 return to the frozen state as shown in FIG. 92(A). Thereafter, the following sequence is repeated: frozen display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for 30 seconds ⇒ normal customer waiting demo effect ⇒ frozen display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for 30 seconds. This normal customer waiting demo effect may be executed not only before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

In contrast, the special customer waiting demo effect (special customer waiting effect) may only be executed after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. In other words, if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 will not execute the special customer waiting demo effect. However, if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special customer waiting demo effect. In the 16th variant, immediately after the power is turned on (before the first variable effect begins), the effect control microcomputer 121 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the special customer waiting demo effect. Therefore, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines by lottery not to execute the special customer waiting demo effect, the special customer waiting demo effect will not be executed until the power is shut off. In the 16th variant, if activation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines by lottery to execute a special customer waiting demo performance with an allocation rate of 30% (predetermined rate).

Furthermore, in the 16th variant, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special customer waiting demo effect only after the power is turned on and before the first variable display of the effect pattern EZ begins. In other words, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 decides by lottery to execute the special customer waiting demo effect, after the first variable display of the effect pattern EZ begins after the power is turned on, the special customer waiting demo effect will not be executed, and the normal customer waiting demo effect will be executed. In this way, only players who start playing for the first time after the power is turned on can be aware of the special customer waiting demo effect.

When the special customer waiting demo effect is executed, as shown in Figure 92 (A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed frozen in their initial display mode (initial result "324") immediately after power is turned on. Then, after the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed frozen in their initial display mode for, for example, 30 seconds, a special customer waiting demo video SD is displayed, as shown in Figure 92 (B-2), showing the main character transforming into a special mode. The display of this special customer waiting demo video SD allows the player to understand that the special customer waiting demo effect is being executed. Then, when the special customer waiting demo video SD ends, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 return to their frozen state in their initial display mode, as shown in Figure 92 (A). Thereafter, the following cycle is repeated: the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed frozen for 30 seconds ⇒ the special customer waiting demo effect ⇒ the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed frozen for 30 seconds.

In this way, a player who understands the special customer waiting demo effect can be made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously had the excess prize ball prevention function activated. As a result, it is possible to make the player realize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and to create a sense of anticipation for the game that is about to begin. In other words, by showing the special customer waiting demo effect to the player as a special perk when they first start playing after the power is turned on, it is possible to make the player want to activate the excess prize ball prevention function again for the entire day of play that is about to begin.

As explained in detail above, in the 16th variant, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 stores activation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated in a non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124. This activation information is not erased even if RAM is cleared. As a result, after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 can execute a special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B)) that would not have been executed before the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated, based on the activation information stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124. This allows a player who recognizes the special SP reach to enjoy a novel SP reach, and also makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously awarded excessive prize balls.

Furthermore, in the 16th variant, after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 can execute a special cut-in preview effect (see Figure 90 (B-2)) that would not be executed before the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated, based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124. This allows players who understand the special cut-in preview to enjoy a novel cut-in preview effect (preview effect), and also makes them aware that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously awarded excessive prize balls.

Furthermore, in the 16th variant, after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 can execute a special opening presentation (see Figures 91 (B-2) and 91 (C-2)) that would not have been executed before the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated, based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124. This allows players who understand the special opening presentation to enjoy a novel opening presentation, and also makes them aware that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously awarded excessive prize balls.

Furthermore, in the 16th variant, after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a special customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2)) that would not be executed before the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated, based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124. In this way, by showing the special customer waiting demo effect to a player who is selecting a pachinko gaming machine to play, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has previously been awarded excessive prize balls, and to make the player want to start playing on this pachinko gaming machine PY1.

<Seventeenth Modification>
In the sixteenth modification, if the control that disabled a game from being executed continues after the power is turned on, it is difficult for the employees of the amusement facility to immediately recognize that the control that disabled a game from being executed continues. In contrast, the seventeenth modification is configured so that if the control that disabled a game from being executed continues after the power is turned on, the employees of the amusement facility can immediately recognize that the control that disabled a game from being executed continues.

Based on Figure 93, we will explain the case where control that disables game play continues after the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. As a prerequisite, the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, and the jackpot game state has ended, causing the excessive prize ball prevention function to be activated (predetermined stop conditions to be met). In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the excessive prize ball prevention stop flag instead of the game stop flag of the above form. As a result, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), the judgment process of step S101 judges YES, and game play is controlled to be disabled. Then, it is assumed that the power is cut off. The excessive prize ball prevention stop flag is switched off when RAM is cleared.

Under these preconditions, as shown in Figure 93 (A), the power is turned on. At this time (when the power is turned on), if an amusement parlor employee does not press the RAM clear switch 191, RAM clear will not be executed. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the over-prize ball prevention stop flag is ON and whether the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed (RAM clear has not been executed) during the power-on processing (S101) of the main control processing. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the over-prize ball prevention stop flag is ON and that the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed, it sends an over-prize ball abnormality maintenance command to the presentation control board 120, indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has not been deactivated. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the over-prize ball prevention stop flag is OFF or that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed, it does not send the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance command to the presentation control board 120.

In this way, immediately after powering on, when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance command, it executes the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance effect shown in Figure 93 (B). Specifically, during the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance effect, a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (alert means), along with an over-prize ball abnormality maintenance image KRX indicating "Error X: Over-prize ball abnormality not resolved. Please clear RAM." Additionally, a voice (over-prize ball abnormality maintenance voice) stating "Over-prize ball abnormality not resolved. Please clear RAM" is output from the speaker 52 (alert means). Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 (alert means) flash red, and all panel lamps 54 (alert means) flash red. This over-prize ball abnormality maintenance effect makes it easy for arcade employees to understand that the over-prize ball prevention function has not been deactivated and that play remains unplayable.

In other words, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the RAM clear switch 191 must be pressed when the power is turned on the following day, but there is a possibility that an amusement parlor employee may not be fully aware that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 had the excessive prize ball prevention function activated the previous day, and may not press the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on. Therefore, even if such a case occurs, it is possible to immediately let the amusement parlor employee know that the control that made gameplay impossible continues due to the excessive prize ball abnormality maintenance effect. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid a situation in which the control that made gameplay impossible remains in place even after business hours (e.g., 9:00) have started the day after the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated, preventing players from playing.

The abnormal over-prize ball display shown in Figure 93 (B) is a special display that is only executed if the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function continues after the power is turned on. In other words, the abnormal over-prize ball display is an effect that will not be executed except in situations where the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function continues after the power is turned on, including immediately after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. Therefore, it is possible to show an effect that an arcade employee who becomes aware of the abnormal over-prize ball display after the power is turned on an effect that they have never seen before, making it easier for them to recognize that an abnormality has occurred.

The abnormal over-prize ball display shown in Figure 93(B) begins immediately after power is turned on and continues until power is turned off. In other words, the abnormal over-prize ball display will not be stopped while the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on. This makes it easier for arcade staff to notice that the abnormal over-prize ball display is being executed after power is turned on. The image display device 50 (display screen 50a), speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board lamp 54 that execute the abnormal over-prize ball display shown in Figure 93(B) correspond to "alert means." The abnormal over-prize ball image KRX displayed on the display screen 50a, the voice output from the speaker 52 saying "The abnormal over-prize ball has not been cleared. Please clear the RAM," and the red flashing of the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 correspond to "special abnormality modes."

Next, referring to Figure 94, we will explain the case where control that disables gameplay continues after power is turned on after an illegal magnetism is detected. As a prerequisite, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in error processing (S111) that an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality) is present (when a predetermined stop condition is met), it turns on the magnetic detection stop flag. As a result (because the magnetic detection stop flag is ON), the main timer interrupt processing (S005) determines YES in the determination processing of step S101, thereby disabling gameplay. It is then assumed that the power is cut off. The magnetic detection stop flag is switched off when RAM is cleared. In other words, as with the twelfth variant, when illegal magnetism is detected, gameplay can be restored to a state where it is possible to play the game, provided that RAM is cleared.

Under these preconditions, as shown in Figure 94 (A), the power is turned on. At this time (when the power is turned on), if an amusement facility employee does not press the RAM clear switch 191, RAM clear will not be executed. In this case, during the power-on processing (S101) of the main control processing, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines whether the magnetic detection stop flag is ON and whether the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed (RAM clear has not been executed). If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the magnetic detection stop flag is ON and that the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed, it sends a magnetic abnormality maintenance command to the presentation control board 120, indicating that the abnormality based on magnetic detection has not been resolved. On the other hand, if the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the magnetic detection stop flag is OFF or that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed, it does not send the magnetic abnormality maintenance command to the presentation control board 120.

Thus, immediately after power-on, when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a magnetic anomaly maintenance command, it executes the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect shown in Figure 94 (B). Specifically, in the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect, a blue background image BL is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (alarm means), along with a magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1 indicating "Error 1: Magnetic detection anomaly has not been resolved. Please clear RAM." Additionally, a voice (magnetic anomaly maintenance voice) stating "Magnetic detection anomaly has not been resolved. Please clear RAM" is output from the speaker 52 (alarm means). Furthermore, all frame lamps 53 (alarm means) flash blue, and all board lamps 54 (alarm means) flash blue. This magnetic anomaly maintenance effect makes it easy for arcade employees to understand that the magnetic detection-based anomaly has not been resolved and that play remains unplayable.

The magnetic abnormality maintenance effect shown in Figure 94 (B) is a dedicated effect that is only executed if an abnormality based on magnetic detection continues after the power is turned on. In other words, the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect is an effect that will not be executed except in situations where an abnormality based on magnetic detection continues after the power is turned on, including immediately after an unauthorized magnetism is detected. Therefore, it is possible to show arcade employees who become aware of the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect after the power is turned on an effect they have never seen before, making it easier for them to recognize that an abnormality has occurred.

The magnetic abnormality maintenance effect shown in Figure 94 (B) begins immediately after power is turned on and continues until the power is turned off. In other words, the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect will not be stopped while the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on. This makes it easier for arcade employees to notice that the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect is being executed after power is turned on. The magnetic abnormality maintenance image KR1 displayed on the display screen 50a, the voice output from the speaker 52 saying "Magnetic detection abnormality not cleared. Please clear RAM," and the blue flashing of the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 correspond to the "special abnormality mode."

As explained in detail above, in the 17th variant, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 disables game play. Subsequently, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the arcade employee may not have pressed the RAM clear switch 191. In this case, even though the control that disabled game play continues, the arcade employee may mistakenly believe that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is still playable. However, even in such a case, as shown in Figure 93 (B), the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance effect is displayed by displaying the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance image KRX on the display screen 50a, outputting a voice message from the speaker 52 stating, "The over-prize ball abnormality has not been resolved. Please clear the RAM," and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 all flashing red. This ensures that the arcade employee is aware that the control that disabled game play continues.

In addition, in the seventeenth variant, when an unauthorized magnetism is detected, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the machine to disable gameplay. Subsequently, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the amusement parlor employee may not have pressed the RAM clear switch 191. In this case, even though the control that disabled gameplay continues, the amusement parlor employee may mistakenly believe that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is still playable. However, even in such a case, as shown in Figure 94 (B), the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect is displayed on the display screen 50a as a magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1, the speaker 52 outputs a voice message stating "Magnetic detection anomaly has not been cleared. Please clear the RAM," and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 all flash blue. This ensures that the amusement parlor employee is aware that the control that disabled gameplay continues.

<18th Modification>
In the above-mentioned 17th modified example, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, the VAT opening and closing member 15k, the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k do not move before the player starts playing. In contrast, in the 18th modified example, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, the VAT opening and closing member 15k, the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k are configured to be movable before the player starts playing.

However, when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated (when a predetermined condition is met) or when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined condition is met), the game is disabled, and the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chute opening/closing member 12k, and distribution member 16k will no longer open or close (move). Note that hereinafter, the movable members whose drive is controlled by the game control microcomputer 101, i.e., the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chute opening/closing member 12k, and distribution member 16k, will be referred to as "game movable members" as appropriate.

However, because the stopping of the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and distribution member 16k) is not performed at the timing expected by the game control microcomputer 101, there is a risk of ball jamming occurring as a result of the game being stopped. Here, ball jamming means that a game ball is interposed between a movable member and the part facing the movable member, and the game ball remains stuck there. In this way, as the game is controlled to be unplayable, ball jamming by the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, ball jamming by the VAT opening and closing member 15k, ball jamming by the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and ball jamming by the distribution member 16k can be expected.

In the eighteenth variant, therefore, a ball-sticking prevention mode can be set after the power is turned on after game play has been disabled, so that the ball-sticking problem can be resolved. The ball-sticking prevention mode is one of the modes set by the game control microcomputer 101. In addition to the ball-sticking prevention mode, the game control microcomputer 101 can also set other modes, primarily game mode and RAM clear mode. The game mode is the mode in which the player is able to play. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 can be said to be set in game mode when it executes steps S102 to S114 of the main timer interrupt process (S005) (see Figure 32) at intervals of, for example, 4 msec. Furthermore, the RAM clear mode is the mode in which RAM clearing is executed immediately after powering on. Therefore, when the RAM clear mode is set, steps S102 to S114 of the main timer interrupt process (S005) (see Figure 32) are not executed, and the player is unable to play.

The ball jam prevention mode of the 18th variant is set on the condition that RAM clear is executed after power is turned on after game play has been disabled. In other words, the condition for starting the ball jam prevention mode is that RAM clear is executed after power is turned on, thereby releasing the control that disabled game play, as shown in FIG. 95. The condition for ending the ball jam prevention mode is that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. In other words, after the ball jam prevention mode is set, the ball jam prevention mode will continue unless the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. As described above, the ball jam prevention mode will start when the RAM clear mode ends, and the game mode will start when the ball jam prevention mode ends.

While the ball trap prevention mode is set, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeatedly opens and closes the first large prize opening 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeatedly opens and closes the second large prize opening 15, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k repeatedly opens and closes the second start opening 12 (electric chute 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeatedly opens and closes the specific area 16 (see Figure 3). This makes it possible to eliminate ball trapping caused by the normal AT opening/closing member 14 around the first large prize opening 14. It is also possible to eliminate ball trapping caused by the VAT opening/closing member 15k around the second large prize opening 15. It is also possible to eliminate ball trapping caused by the electric chute opening/closing member 12k around the second start opening 12. It is also possible to eliminate ball trapping caused by the distribution member 16k around the specific area 16. The "first major prize opening 14," "second major prize opening 15," "second starting opening 12," and "specific area 16" correspond to the "ball entry area."

Here, by resolving the ball jamming as described above, a game ball that has been stuck around the first large prize opening 14 may begin to flow down and enter the first large prize opening 14. Alternatively, a game ball that has been stuck around the second large prize opening 15 may begin to flow down and enter the second large prize opening 15. Alternatively, a game ball that has been stuck around the second start opening 12 may begin to flow down and enter the second start opening 12. Alternatively, a game ball that has been stuck around the specific area 16 may begin to flow down and pass through the specific area 16 (enter the specific area 16). In these cases, if a prize ball were to be paid out or a transition to a high probability state were to be granted, an unfair benefit would be awarded to the player.

Therefore, in the 18th variant, while the ball jam prevention mode is set, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to disable the detection of game balls by the first large prize opening sensor (detection means), the second large prize opening sensor 15a (detection means), the second start opening sensor (detection means), and the specific area sensor 16a (detection means). Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first large prize opening 14 while the ball jam prevention mode is set, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the first large prize opening sensor is valid, and therefore no prize balls are awarded. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second large prize opening sensor 15a is valid, and therefore no prize balls are awarded. Furthermore, even if a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12, the gaming control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting hole sensor is valid, and therefore no prize ball is awarded. Also, even if a gaming ball passes through the specific area 16, the gaming control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid, and therefore no transition to a high probability state is awarded. As described above, in the ball jamming prevention mode, it is possible to eliminate ball jamming while preventing unfair benefits from being awarded to players.

Next, the flow of the ball jam prevention mode of the 18th modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 95. As a prerequisite, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game so that it cannot be executed by activating the excessive prize ball prevention function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95, a red background image RE and an error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Here, the gaming parlor employee, upon realizing that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, turns off the power switch 193. Thereafter, on the day the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the gaming parlor employee does not turn on the power switch 193, leaving the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 shut off.

Then, before business hours begin the next day, an employee of the arcade turns on the power switch 193 while pressing the RAM clear switch 191. This executes a RAM clear and sets the machine to RAM clear mode. When the machine is set to RAM clear mode, the display screen 50a displays a RAM clear notification image RC that reads, "Please wait a moment. If you press the push button five times during the RAM clear notification, the initial function setting image will be displayed." When the RAM clear is completed, the machine automatically switches from RAM clear mode to ball jam prevention mode.

When the ball-biting prevention mode is initiated, a ball-biting prevention mode image TG displaying the words "Ball-biting prevention mode" is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the speaker 52 outputs the audio message "Ball-biting prevention mode." This allows arcade employees to easily understand that the ball-biting prevention mode is active. While the ball-biting prevention mode is active, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeatedly opens and closes the first large prize opening 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeatedly opens and closes the second large prize opening 15, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k repeatedly opens and closes the second start opening 12 (electric chute 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeatedly opens and closes the specific area 16 (see Figure 3). This makes it possible to resolve ball-biting around the first large prize opening 14, the second large prize opening 15, the second start opening 12, or the specific area 16.

As described above, the ball jam prevention mode of the 18th variant continues until an amusement facility employee presses the RAM clear switch 191. In other words, the opening and closing operations of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, the VAT opening and closing member 15k, the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k continue until the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. In this way, an amusement facility employee can continue the ball jam prevention mode for any length of time until they confirm that the ball jamming has been resolved.

In this way, when the ball jam prevention mode is set, pressing the RAM clear switch 191 switches to game mode. In game mode, the display screen 50a displays the normal daytime background image G102, and shows the effect symbol EZ stopped and displayed in its initial display mode (initial result "324"). By switching to game mode in this way, the player can begin playing.

Note that Figure 95 describes the flow of the ball jamming prevention mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated as an example. However, the flow of the ball jamming prevention mode when illegal magnetism is detected is the same except that, while the game is controlled to be unplayable, the error reset method image ER1 (see Figure 27(B)) is displayed on the display screen 50a instead of the error reset method image ERX (see Figure 95), so a description of that flow will be omitted.

Next, the power-on processing (S001) of the 18th modified example will be described with reference to Figure 96. Note that the power-on processing (S001) of the 18th modified example shown in Figure 96 is a detailed explanation of the power-on processing (S001) shown in Figure 31.

[Power-On Processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the power-on processing (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the game RAM 104 (S011). This allows information to be written to and read from the game RAM 104. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (whether it has been turned ON) (S012). That is, when the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether it has received a RAM clear operation signal from the power supply board 190 indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed. If the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (YES in S012), the process proceeds to the RAM clear processing of step S018. On the other hand, if it has not been pressed (NO in S012), the process then determines whether the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power interruption flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power interruption (that the power supply has been cut off), and is turned ON by the power interruption monitoring process (S114) shown in Figure 32 when the power is interrupted.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S013), there is a possibility that the power was not shut off properly, so the process proceeds to the RAM clear process in step S018. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S013), a checksum is calculated (S014) and compared with the checksum calculated when the power was shut off (S015). The checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the game RAM 104 as a numerical value. If the checksum values do not match (NO in S015), the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are not normal, so the process proceeds to the RAM clear process in step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S016.

In step S016, the setting management of the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when power is restored is performed. In this setting process, power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. The gaming control microcomputer 101 then turns off the power-off flag (S017) and proceeds to step S019.

In step S019, as other initial settings, the game control microcomputer 101 performs settings for the game CPU 102, SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc., and then ends this process.

[RAM Clear Processing] As shown in Figure 97, in the RAM clear processing (S018), the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the presentation control board 120 (S020). As a result, the presentation control microcomputer 121, which has received the RAM clear notification command, understands that RAM clearing is about to begin and outputs a command to the image control board 140 to display a RAM clear notification image RC (see Figure 95).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 clears (deletes) the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, information on the game state, such as a high probability state, the number of reserved special symbols, and the results of the jackpot determination) (S021). The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether the RAM clear has been completed (S022). If it determines that the RAM clear has not been completed (NO in S022), the process returns to step S021. In this way, the RAM clear mode continues until the RAM clear is completed. On the other hand, if it determines in step S022 that the RAM clear has been completed (YES in S022), the process initializes the active area of the game RAM 104 (S023). During this initialization (S023), the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the working area of the game RAM 104.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game stop flag, which indicates that game play has been disabled, is ON (S024). If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S024), it means that the power has not been turned on after game play was disabled, and the process proceeds to step S019 shown in Figure 96. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S024), it means that the power has been turned on after game play was disabled, and the game stop flag is turned OFF (S025). This cancels the control that disabled game play. Then, after executing ball jam prevention mode processing (S026), the process proceeds to step S019 shown in Figure 96.

As explained in the 17th variant, if the stop flag for preventing excessive prize balls is turned ON instead of the game stop flag when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, step S024 determines whether the stop flag for preventing excessive prize balls is ON. If it is ON, step S025 turns the stop flag for preventing excessive prize balls OFF, and the process proceeds to the ball jamming prevention mode processing (S026). Also, as explained in the 17th variant, if the stop flag for detecting magnetic fields is turned ON instead of the game stop flag when an illegal magnetism is detected, step S024 determines whether the stop flag for detecting magnetic fields is ON. If it is ON, step S025 turns the stop flag for detecting magnetic fields OFF, and the process proceeds to the ball jamming prevention mode processing (S026).

[Ball-biting prevention mode processing] As shown in Figure 98, in the ball-biting prevention mode processing (S026), the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a ball-biting prevention mode notification command to the presentation control board 120 (S030). As a result, the presentation control microcomputer 121, which has received the ball-biting prevention mode notification command, understands that the ball-biting prevention mode has started, and outputs a command to the image control board 140 to display the ball-biting prevention mode image TG (see Figure 95). In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 121, which has received the ball-biting prevention mode notification command, controls the audio control circuit 161 (see Figure 7) so that the sound "ball-biting prevention mode" is output from the speaker 52.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal AT opening/closing member drive process (S031). This normal AT opening/closing member drive process (S031) drives the first large prize opening solenoid, causing normal AT opening/closing member 14k to repeatedly open and close the first large prize opening 14. The game control microcomputer 101 also executes a VAT opening/closing member drive process (S032). This VAT opening/closing member drive process (S032) drives the second large prize opening solenoid, causing VAT opening/closing member 15k to repeatedly open and close the second large prize opening 15. The game control microcomputer 101 also executes an electric chute opening/closing member drive process (S033). This electric chute opening/closing member drive process (S033) drives the electric chute solenoid, causing electric chute opening/closing member 12k to repeatedly open and close the second start opening 12. The game control microcomputer 101 also executes a distribution member drive process (S034). This distribution member drive process (S034) drives the distribution solenoid 16s (see Figure 3), causing the distribution member 16k to repeatedly open and close the specific area 16.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sensor detection invalidation process (S035). This sensor detection invalidation process (S035) disables the detection of game balls by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a. As a result, even if a game ball enters the first large prize opening 14, the game control microcomputer 101 will not determine that the detection of the game ball by the first large prize opening sensor is valid, and no prize balls will be awarded. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15, the game control microcomputer 101 will not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second large prize opening sensor is valid, and no prize balls will be awarded. Furthermore, even if a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12, the gaming control microcomputer 101 will not determine that the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting hole sensor is valid, and no prize ball will be awarded. Furthermore, even if a gaming ball passes through the specific area 16, the gaming control microcomputer 101 will not determine that the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid, and no transition to a high probability state will be awarded.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (S036). If the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed (NO in S036), the process returns to step S031, and steps S031 to S036 are repeated. In this way, the ball jam prevention mode continues until the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed.

Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (YES in S036), it outputs a ball-stick prevention mode end command to the presentation control board 120 (S037). Having received the ball-stick prevention mode end command, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines that the ball-stick prevention mode has ended, and outputs a command to the image control board 140 to display the normal daytime background image G102 (see FIG. 95) and the initial display mode of the presentation pattern EZ (initial result "324"). Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sensor detection enable switching process (S038), and proceeds to the processing of step S019 shown in FIG. 96.

In this way, the sensor detection enable switching process (S038) enables the detection of game balls by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a. As a result, the player can play as usual as the system transitions from ball jam prevention mode to game mode.

As explained in detail above, in the 18th variant, if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and game play is disabled, there is a risk of ball jamming occurring in the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and distribution part 16k). Therefore, as shown in Figure 95, from the time the power is turned on until the transition to game mode is made, the ball jamming prevention mode is set and the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and distribution part 16k) move. This makes it possible to automatically eliminate ball jamming even if it occurs in the game movable parts.

In addition, in the 18th variant, if unauthorized magnetism is detected and game play is disabled, there is a risk of ball jamming occurring in the game moving parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and sorting part 16k). Therefore, from the time the power is turned on until the transition to game mode is made, the ball jamming prevention mode is set and the game moving parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and sorting part 16k) move. This makes it possible to automatically eliminate ball jamming even if it occurs in the game moving parts.

In addition, in the 18th variant, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, if the ball jamming is resolved by the movement of the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, distribution part 16k), there is a risk that the game ball will enter the first large prize opening 14, the second large prize opening 15, or the second start opening 12, or pass through the specific area 16. However, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, the detection of the game ball by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a is disabled. This makes it possible to prevent unintended bonuses from being awarded after the power is turned on.

Furthermore, in the 18th variant, if the game is not disabled before power is turned on, the ball jam prevention mode will not be set between power on and transition to game mode, and the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, distribution part 16k) will not move. On the other hand, if the control that disabled game play is released by clearing the RAM after power is turned on, as shown in Figure 95, the ball jam prevention mode will be set between power on and transition to game mode, and the game movable parts will move. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game movable parts from moving every time the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to move the game movable parts to eliminate (prevent) ball jamming only in the special situation where the game is disabled before power is turned on and the control that disabled game play is released after power is turned on.

<19th Modification>
In the above-mentioned 18th modified example, the ball-biting prevention mode is set after the power is turned on after the game is disabled (see Figure 95). In contrast, in the 19th modified example, as shown in Figure 99, the ball-biting prevention mode is set after the game is disabled and before the power is cut off. The following will mainly explain the differences from the 18th modified example.

The ball-biting prevention mode of the 19th variant is automatically switched to after game play is disabled. In other words, in the 19th variant, the only condition for initiating the ball-biting prevention mode is that game play is disabled, and no action by an amusement facility employee is required. While the ball-biting prevention mode is active, as in the 18th variant described above, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeatedly opens and closes the first large prize opening 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeatedly opens and closes the second large prize opening 15, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k repeatedly opens and closes the second start opening 12 (electric chute 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeatedly opens and closes the specific area 16 (see Figure 3). This makes it possible to resolve ball-biting around the first large prize opening 14 due to the normal AT opening/closing member 14. Furthermore, it is possible to resolve ball-biting around the second large prize opening 15 due to the VAT. Furthermore, even if the ball becomes trapped by the electric chute opening/closing member 12k around the second starting port 12, it is possible to eliminate the ball trapping. Also, even if the ball becomes trapped by the distribution member 16k around the specific area 16, it is possible to eliminate the ball trapping.

Furthermore, while the ball jamming prevention mode is set, as in the above-mentioned 18th variant, the game control microcomputer 101 disables detection of game balls by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a. Therefore, from the time the over-prize ball prevention function is activated until the power is cut off, even if a game ball enters the first large prize opening 14, no prize balls will be awarded. Even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15, no prize balls will be awarded. Even if a game ball enters the second start opening 12, no prize balls will be awarded. Even if a game ball passes through the specific area 16, no transition to the high probability state will be awarded. As described above, even in the 19th variant, it is possible to resolve ball jamming in the setting change mode while preventing players from receiving unfair benefits.

In the 19th variant, the ball jam prevention mode is automatically terminated when a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started. In other words, the condition for terminating the ball jam prevention mode is that a specified time has elapsed since the ball jam prevention mode was started, as shown in Figure 99. In this way, once the specified time has elapsed, the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, distribution part 16k) will no longer move, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the game movable parts continue to move for longer than necessary.

In other words, immediately after game play is disabled, it is assumed that the player will still be sitting in front of the pachinko game machine PY1. In such a situation, if the game movable part continues to move for a long time, it may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by limiting the setting of the ball jamming prevention mode to a specified time after game play is disabled, it is possible to minimize the discomfort felt by the player due to the game movable part continuing to move.

Next, the flow of the ball jam prevention mode of the 19th variant will be explained based on Figure 99. As a prerequisite, assume that a jackpot game is being played and the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In this case, as shown in Figure 99, the game mode is still set and the excessive prize ball prevention function is not activated. After that, when the jackpot game state ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, preventing the game from being played, and at this time the game mode is automatically switched to the ball jam prevention mode.

When the ball jam prevention mode is initiated, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large prize opening 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large prize opening 15, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second start opening 12 (electric chute 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening/closing operation for the specific area 16 (see Figure 3). This makes it possible to eliminate ball jamming even if it occurs around the first large prize opening 14, the second large prize opening 15, the second start opening 12, or the specific area 16.

Here, in the 19th variant, even when the ball jamming prevention mode is initiated, as shown in Figure 96, the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. This allows the player who activated the excessive prize ball prevention function to understand only that the game is not playable, and prevents them from being aware that the ball jamming prevention mode has been set. In this way, in the ball jamming prevention mode before the power is cut off, no effect is executed that suggests that the ball jamming mode has been set, so the player does not feel uncomfortable that the game movable part is moving.

Then, when a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the ball jam prevention mode was initiated, the ball jam prevention mode will automatically end. Thus, unlike the 18th variant, the ball jam prevention mode can be terminated without any operation by the arcade staff. Note that the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX remain displayed on the display screen 50a before and after the ball jam prevention mode has ended. After that, the arcade staff will realize that the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated in this pachinko gaming machine PY1 and will turn off the power switch 193.

Note that Figure 99 describes the flow of the ball jamming prevention mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated as an example. However, the flow of the ball jamming prevention mode when illegal magnetism is detected is the same except that, while the game is controlled to be unplayable, the error reset method image ER1 (see Figure 27(B)) is displayed on the display screen 50a instead of the error reset method image ERX (see Figure 99), so a description of that flow will be omitted.

Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the 19th modified example will be described with reference to Figure 100. Note that the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) shown in Figure 100 is executed in place of the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) shown in Figure 32.

[Main timer interrupt processing] As shown in Figure 100, in the main timer interrupt processing (S100), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the game stop flag is ON. If the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the game is not being controlled to be unplayable, and the processing of steps S102 to S114 is carried out as described above. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the game is being controlled to be unplayable, and the ball jam prevention mode processing is carried out (S116) before proceeding to step S114.

As explained in the 17th variant, if the stop flag for preventing excessive prize balls is turned ON instead of the game stop flag when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, step S101 determines whether the stop flag for preventing excessive prize balls is ON. If it is ON, the process proceeds to the ball jamming prevention mode processing (S116). Also, as explained in the 17th variant, if the stop flag for detecting magnetic fields is turned ON instead of the game stop flag when an illegal magnetism is detected, step S101 determines whether the stop flag for detecting magnetic fields is ON. If it is ON, the process proceeds to the ball jamming prevention mode processing (S116).

[Ball Sticking Prevention Mode Processing] As shown in Figure 101, in the ball sticking prevention mode processing (S116), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the ball sticking prevention mode end flag is ON (S040). The ball sticking prevention mode end flag indicates that the ball sticking prevention mode has ended. If the ball sticking prevention mode end flag is ON (YES in S040), the ball sticking prevention mode has ended, and this processing immediately ends. On the other hand, if the ball sticking prevention mode end flag is not ON (YES in S040), it then determines whether the ball sticking prevention mode start flag is ON (S041). The ball sticking prevention mode start flag indicates that the ball sticking prevention mode has started.

If the ball jam prevention mode start flag is ON (YES in S041), proceed to step S043. On the other hand, if the ball jam prevention mode start flag is not ON (NO in S041), the ball jam prevention mode start flag is set ON (S042) and proceed to step S043. In step S043, the normal AT opening/closing member drive process is executed. This normal AT opening/closing member drive process (S043) drives the first large prize opening solenoid, causing normal AT opening/closing member 14k to repeatedly open and close the first large prize opening 14. Next, the VAT opening/closing member drive process is executed (S044). This VAT opening/closing member drive process (S044) drives the second large prize opening solenoid, causing VAT opening/closing member 15k to repeatedly open and close the second large prize opening 15. Next, the electric chute opening/closing member drive process is executed (S045). This electric chute opening/closing member drive process (S045) drives the electric chute solenoid, causing the electric chute opening/closing member 12k to repeatedly open and close the second starting port 12. Next, the sorting member drive process is executed (S046). This sorting member drive process (S046) drives the sorting solenoid 16s (see Figure 3), causing the sorting member 16k to repeatedly open and close the specific area 16.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sensor detection disable process (S047). This sensor detection disable process (S047) disables detection of game balls by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a. As a result, even if a game ball enters the first large prize opening 14, no prize balls will be awarded; even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15, no prize balls will be awarded; even if a game ball enters the second start opening 12, no prize balls will be awarded; and even if a game ball passes through the specific area 16, no transition to a high probability state will be granted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the ball-sticking prevention mode began (S048). If the specified time has not elapsed (NO in S048), it is not time to end the ball-sticking prevention mode, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the specified time has elapsed (YES in S048), it is time to end the ball-sticking prevention mode. Therefore, the ball-sticking prevention mode end flag is turned ON (S049), the ball-sticking prevention mode start flag is turned OFF (S050), and this process ends.

As explained in detail above, in the 19th variant, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and game play is disabled, there is a risk of ball jamming occurring in the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and distribution part 16k). Therefore, as shown in Figure 99, after game play is disabled and before the power is cut off, the ball jamming prevention mode is set and the game movable parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and distribution part 16k) move. This makes it possible to automatically eliminate ball jamming even if it occurs in the game movable parts.

In addition, in the 19th variant, if unauthorized magnetism is detected and game play is disabled, there is a risk of ball jamming occurring in the game moving parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and sorting part 16k). Therefore, after game play is disabled and before the power is cut off, the ball jamming prevention mode is set, and the game moving parts (normal AT opening/closing part 14k, VAT opening/closing part 15k, electric chute opening/closing part 12k, and sorting part 16k) move. This makes it possible to automatically eliminate ball jamming even if it occurs in the game moving parts.

In addition, in the 19th variant, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, if the ball jamming is resolved by moving the game movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chute opening/closing member 12k, and distribution member 16k), there is a risk that the game ball will enter the first large prize opening 14, the second large prize opening 15, or the second start opening 12, or pass through the specific area 16. However, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, the detection of the game ball by the first large prize opening sensor, the second large prize opening sensor 15a, the second start opening sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a is disabled. This makes it possible to prevent unintended bonuses from being awarded between the time the game is disabled and the time the power is cut off.

<Other Modifications>
In the above embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called V-sure machine (a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the gaming ball into the specific region 16 (V region)), but it may also be configured as a gaming machine in which transition to a high probability state is determined based on the type of jackpot symbol that is won. Also, in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples (excluding the second modified example), the machine is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the number of times the special symbol changes), but it may also be configured as a gaming machine in which, once controlled to a high probability state, control in the high probability state continues until the start of the next jackpot game (a so-called probability loop type machine), or a drop machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the result of a lottery).

In the above-mentioned form and each of the above-mentioned variations, the maximum number of reserved special drawings 1 was four, and the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 was four. However, the maximum number of reserved special drawings 1 and 2 is not limited to four and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-described configuration, the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated when the high-probability, high-base state ended or when the low-probability, high-base state ended. However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-probability, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop play only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive win period)" ends. For example, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the machine transitions to a customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state has continued for a certain period of time. For example, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing small jackpot games, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the small jackpot game state (a state in which a small jackpot game is being executed, a favorable game state) ends. In this case, for example, the excess prize ball prevention function may be activated when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more due to a so-called small prize rush state (a high-probability, low-base state in which small prize games are played more frequently than in a normal game state and game balls are more likely to enter the large prize slot due to the execution of small prize games), and the small prize game state or the high-probability, low-base state ends. Also, for example, the excess prize ball prevention function may be activated when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In the above-described embodiment, the difference in the number of balls is reset (erased) when the first reset condition (see FIG. 26(A)) is met, that is, the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed, or the second reset condition (see FIG. 26(B)) is met, that is, the customer waiting state continues for one hour (a predetermined time). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the difference in the number of balls may be reset when the high-probability, high-base state (advantageous game state) transitions to the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 102(A). In this case, the difference in the number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive winning period)" ends, and therefore the over-prize ball prevention function can be activated only if the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 (the reference number) during a single rush state. In addition to the high probability high base state and low probability high base state, the difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high probability low base state to a normal game state. The difference in the number of balls may also be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

Also, for example, as shown in Figure 102 (B), the difference in the number of balls may be reset when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour). In this case, if the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation has not been advantageous to the player for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference in the number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference in the number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-mentioned specific time is not limited to one hour and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specific number in the normal game state. Also, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (re-powering the power ON).

Also, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 AM) has arrived, it may reset the difference in the number of balls. In this case, it is possible to automatically erase the difference in the number of balls without forcing the amusement center employee to perform any operations. Note that the above-mentioned reference time is not limited to 9:00 AM and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the difference in the number of balls was located on the main control board 100 (see Figure 8). However, as long as a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference in the number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be located, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

In the above-described embodiment, the measured difference in the number of balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured difference in the number of balls may also be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference in the number of balls on the display devices 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, if the difference in the number of balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the display devices 8 or the 7-segment display 300 may display a first mode; if the difference in the number of balls is 50,001 to 70,000 (second range), the display devices 8 or the 7-segment display 300 may display a second mode; and if the difference in the number of balls is 70,001 to 80,000 (third range), the display devices 8 or the 7-segment display 300 may display a third mode. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit information on the total number of winning balls and the total number of balls fired to the presentation control board 120, and the presentation control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference in the number of winning balls based on the information on the total number of winning balls and the information on the total number of balls fired, thereby displaying the difference in the number of winning balls on a display means such as the image display device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit information on the number of winning balls paid out (or the number of winning balls to be paid out) and information on detection by the outlet sensor to the presentation control board 120. The presentation control microcomputer 121 may then calculate the difference in the number of winning balls based on this information, thereby displaying the difference in the number of winning balls on a display means such as the image display device 50. The presentation control microcomputer 121 may also indicate the difference in the number of winning balls (or the range of the difference in the number of winning balls) using the light-emitting mode (light-emitting color) of the light-emitting means (board lamp 54, frame lamp 53) rather than directly indicating the difference in the number of winning balls as a number.

The game control microcomputer 101 may also display the difference in the number of balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in the modified example shown in Figure 103. That is, in this modified example, the information on the difference in the number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four memory areas of the difference in the number of balls memory section 107c of the non-erasable memory section 107. The first memory area stores the difference in the number of balls from the current time the power was turned on to the present time. The second memory area stores the difference in the number of balls from the previous time the power was turned on (one time ago) to the previous time the power was shut off. The third memory area stores the difference in the number of balls from the time the power was turned on two times ago to the time the power was shut off two times ago. The fourth (N)th memory area stores the difference in the number of balls from the time the power was turned on two times ago to the time the power was shut off two times ago. In this way, each time the power is turned OFF and ON, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth memory area is erased. Note that the difference in the number of balls stored in the first through fourth memory areas is not erased even if RAM is cleared.

In this modified example, the difference in number of balls stored in the first memory area, the difference in number of balls stored in the second memory area, the difference in number of balls stored in the third memory area, and the difference in number of balls stored in the fourth memory area are displayed in order in units of 1,000 balls in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds. This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "b134" for 5 seconds. This indicates that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the display displays, for example, "b238" for 5 seconds. This indicates that the previous normal base was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the display displays, for example, "b235" for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Next, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in Figure 103 (E), for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls from the time the power was turned on to the current time is 20,000. Next, as shown in Figure 103 (F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls from the previous time (one time ago) the power was turned on to the previous time the power was shut off is "0." Note that if the total number of balls fired is greater than the total number of winning balls, and the difference in the number of balls is less than "0," "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 103 (G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls from the time (two times ago) the power was turned on to the time (two times ago) the power was shut off is 65,000. Next, as shown in Figure 103 (H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls between the time the power was turned on two times ago (three times ago) and the time the power was turned off two times ago was 48,000. After that, Figures 103 (A) to (H) are displayed repeatedly every five seconds.

In the above-mentioned modified example, each time the power is turned OFF and ON (re-inserted), the measured difference in ball count is shifted and stored, and the difference in ball count stored in the 4th (Nth) memory area is erased. However, each time a RAM clear is performed, the measured difference in ball count may be shifted and stored, and the difference in ball count stored in the 4th (Nth) memory area may be erased. Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that a predetermined specified time has arrived (for example, 9:00 AM), the measured difference in ball count may be shifted and stored, and the difference in ball count stored in the 4th (Nth) memory area may be erased. Note that the above-mentioned N can be changed as long as it is a natural number greater than or equal to 2. Furthermore, while the difference in ball count is displayed in units of thousands, it may also be displayed in units of tens, hundreds, or tens of thousands.

In the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 103, the display of the difference in the number of balls automatically switched every five seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference in the number of balls may also be switched by operating a specified operating means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. It may also be possible to switch between the normal base display and the difference in the number of balls by operating a specified operating means.

In the above configuration, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 70,000 or more (preliminary standard number, specific number), the presentation mode shown in Figure 28 (A) indicates that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in Figure 28 (A) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the approaching activation of the over-prize ball prevention function may be indicated by a special voice from the speaker 52 (e.g., "The difference in the number of balls is 70,000") or a special light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or frame lamp 53. Furthermore, the approaching activation of the over-prize ball prevention function may be indicated by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages as the difference in the number of balls increases.

In the above configuration, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 (the reference number), the presentation shown in Figure 28 (B) indicates a situation in which play may stop. However, the presentation showing a situation in which play may stop is not limited to the presentation shown in Figure 28 (B) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (e.g., "The difference in the number of balls is 80,000") or a special light-emitting mode of light-emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or frame lamp 53 may indicate a situation in which play may stop.

In the above embodiment, when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the presentation shown in Figure 27(A) indicates that the game cannot be played. However, the presentation showing that the game cannot be played is not limited to the presentation shown in Figure 27(A) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "Game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display screen 50a, or a special sound (e.g., "Game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

In the above embodiment, even when RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference in ball numbers stored in the difference in ball number memory unit 107c is not erased. However, the information on the difference in ball numbers may be stored in a specified memory area (erasure memory unit) of the gaming RAM 104, so that the information on the difference in ball numbers is cleared when RAM clear is executed. In other words, the conditions for resetting the difference in ball numbers may include executing a RAM clear, or the reset condition for resetting the difference in ball numbers may be simply executing a RAM clear, or simply restarting the power.

In the above configuration, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control processing related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see Figure 32), but also stops the launch control processing for launching the game balls (processing of step 109, see Figure 32). However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control processing while not stopping the launch control processing. However, in this case, as explained in the fifth variant, even if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, when the player rotates the handle 72k, the game balls will flow down the game area 6. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 101 stops both the game control processing and the launch control processing, it is possible to immediately allow the player to understand that the game is unplayable. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the launch control processing while not stopping the game control processing. However, in this case, there is a problem that game balls may still be flowing down the game area 6 when the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, and game balls may enter various winning holes and award prize balls to the player. Therefore, stopping both the game control process and the launch control process makes it possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of balls fired based on detection by the outlet sensor. However, the total number of balls fired may also be counted based on detection by sensors that detect winning entries into various winning ports (first start port sensor, second start port sensor, general winning port sensor, first large winning port sensor, second large winning port sensor 15a). Alternatively, if a return ball prevention section is provided at the upper end of the inner wall section 1B (see Figure 2) and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention section, the total number of balls fired may be counted based on detection by this sensor.

In the above configuration, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000, the excess ball warning image KY is displayed, as shown in Figure 28 (A). However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, a display explaining that play will become impossible to play when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more can be displayed in a customer waiting display, a display during a jackpot game (for example, an ending display), or a warning display accompanying a variable display. This is because such a display can inform players and arcade employees in advance that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an excess ball prevention function.

In the above embodiment, information on the total number of winning balls, the total number of balls fired, and the difference in the number of balls is stored in the non-erasable memory unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, so that the information on the total number of winning balls, the total number of balls fired, and the difference in the number of balls is not erased even when RAM is cleared. However, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the total number of balls fired, and the difference in the number of balls in a non-volatile memory means (e.g., FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, the information on the total number of winning balls, the total number of balls fired, and the difference in the number of balls may be prevented from being erased even when RAM is cleared.

In the above configuration, the difference in balls is counted from time to time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference in balls can also start from the so-called first hit (winning a jackpot in normal game mode). In this case, the negative difference in balls (i.e., the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit will not be counted. Therefore, the difference in balls that triggers the over-prize ball prevention function can be set to the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above configuration, the game control microcomputer 101 separately counts the total number of winning balls and the total number of shot balls, and calculates the difference in the number of balls by subtracting the total number of shot balls from the total number of winning balls. However, the difference in the number of balls can also be measured (counted) using only the difference in the number of balls counter. That is, each time a winning ball is won, the value of the winning ball is added to the difference in the ball counter. Also, each time a game ball is shot (each time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference in the ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the difference in the number of balls can be measured without separately counting the total number of winning balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the difference in the ball counter can be set to always be greater than or equal to "0" and not to become negative. In this way, as described above, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function can be made to be essentially the same as the number of balls held after the first win.

In the above-described configuration, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the game stop warning image KH shown in FIG. 28(B) is displayed (a game unplayable warning effect), warning that game play will become impossible when the high base state ends (when the game transitions to the normal game state). However, the presentation format of the game unplayable warning effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 28(B) and can be modified as appropriate. For example, the game unplayable warning effect may simply indicate that game play will be disabled at a later date, without indicating when game play will be disabled (when the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated). The game unplayable warning effect may also be an effect in which a game unplayable warning sound (e.g., a sound stating "Game play will soon be disabled") is output from the speaker 52, or an effect in which the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 is illuminated in a game unplayable warning light-up mode (e.g., a light-up mode in which all lights are on and all lights are off repeatedly). The unplayable notification effect can be executed at any time as long as the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (the reference number), and can be set to continue to be executed until the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, or can be executed multiple times at random times.

In the above-mentioned form, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 (a specific number) or more, the pre-play unavailability notice effect shown in FIG. 28(A) is executed; in the above-mentioned eighth variant, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (a specific number) or more, the next jackpot arrival notice effect shown in FIG. 66(B) and the running-up effect shown in FIG. 66(B) to FIG. 68(B) are executed; and in the above-mentioned ninth variant, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect shown in FIG. 72(C) and the mini next jackpot arrival suggestion effect shown in FIG. 72(D) are executed. However, the presentation format of each of the above-mentioned effects (pre-notification effects) is not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the advance warning effect may be an effect in which a game-unplayable warning sound is output from the speaker 52 (e.g., a sound stating, "The difference in the number of balls has reached XXXXXX (a specific number). If the difference in the number of balls increases by (the base number - a specific number) further, the game will become unplayable."), or an effect in which the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all illuminated in red (a special light-emitting mode). Furthermore, the advance warning effect is not limited to a direct warning that the game will become unplayable, as shown in Figures 28(A) and 66(B). It may also be an effect in which a special image or a special sound is displayed that indirectly suggests that the game will become unplayable. For example, only when the difference in the number of balls is 78,500 (a specific number) or more, a special character image or a special item image may be displayed to indirectly suggest that the game will become unplayable. Furthermore, the specific number that triggers the advance warning effect is not limited to 70,000, 78,500, or 79,550, but may also be, for example, 60,000, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the specific number that triggers the start of the advance notice effect may be a value (79,050) obtained by subtracting the average number of prize balls (950) that are set to be awarded in jackpot games X, Y, and Z based on winning the three jackpot patterns X, Y, and Z from a reference number (80,000). The timing of the advance notice effect can also be changed as appropriate; for example, it may be executed only during the win suggestion effect (while the SP reach background image G113, which shows the main character rejoicing after winning the battle, is displayed), or it may be executed every time the effect mode is switched, or every time a predetermined number of variations are performed, or it may be executed at random times determined by lottery.

In the above-described embodiment, if the player rotates the handle 72k (firing operation means) after the game is disabled, the operation warning effect (warning effect) shown in FIG. 51(B) or FIG. 52(B) is executed. Furthermore, in the fifth modified example, if the player touches the handle 72k after the game is disabled, the contact warning effect (warning effect) shown in FIG. 61(B) or FIG. 62(B) is executed. However, the presentation format of the warning effect is not limited to the above and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the player operates the normal button 40 or special button 41 (presentation operation means) after the game is disabled, the warning effect may be executed.

In the first variant described above, as shown in Figure 53, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the second special symbol has changed four times since transitioning to the normal game mode (with special symbol 2 remaining in reserve), the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the remaining reserve special effect (special effect) shown in Figure 54 ends. However, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the combined number of changes of the second special symbol and the first special symbol has changed four times since transitioning to the normal game mode, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated and the remaining reserve special effect (special effect) shown in Figure 54 may end. Note that the number of times mentioned above is not limited to four and may be, for example, one time, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second modified example described above, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the round substitute effect (alternative effect) shown in FIG. 55(B) is executed instead of the round effect shown in FIG. 55(A). However, the presentation style of the round substitute effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 55(B) and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated. Furthermore, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, a jackpot opening substitute effect suggesting that the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated may be executed instead of the jackpot opening effect shown in FIG. 18(C-1). Furthermore, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, a jackpot ending substitute effect suggesting that the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated may be executed instead of the jackpot ending effect shown in FIG. 18(C-3).

In the second modified example described above, when the difference in the number of balls reached 80,000 or more, the time-saving mode alternative effect (alternative effect) shown in FIG. 55(C) was executed instead of the time-saving mode effect shown in FIG. 18(B-5). However, the presentation style of the time-saving mode alternative effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 55(C) and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. Also, in the sixth modified example described above, when the difference in the number of balls reached 80,000 or more, the probability variable mode alternative effect (alternative effect) shown in FIG. 63(C) was executed instead of the probability variable mode effect shown in FIG. 18(B-4). However, the presentation style of the probability variable mode alternative effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63(C) and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the third variant described above, as shown in Figure 57, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the special symbol has changed 30 times (a specified number of times) since transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state (when a specified condition is met), the excess prize ball prevention function is activated. However, the specified number of times described above is not limited to 30 and can be, for example, 1 or 100, and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and after transitioning to the normal game state, the excess prize ball prevention function may be activated under conditions unrelated to the number of times the special symbol has changed. For example, the excess prize ball prevention function may be activated when the machine transitions to the normal game state, then transitions to the customer waiting state, or when a specified time has passed since transitioning to the normal game state.

In the third modified example described above, as shown in Figure 57, when the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more and the special symbol has changed 30 times (a specified number of times) since transitioning to the normal game mode, the excess prize ball prevention function is activated and the special effect (special effect) shown in Figure 58 ends. Here, the specified number (30) refers to the combined number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed, but it may refer to only the number of times the first special symbol has changed, or only the number of times the second special symbol has changed. Furthermore, the presentation style of the special effect is not limited to the presentation style of the special effect after transitioning to the normal game mode shown in Figure 58, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a presentation style in which the special symbol is only executed if the number of times the special symbol has changed is within a specified number of times since transitioning to the normal game mode.

In the above embodiment, the fifth variant, the twelfth variant, the seventeenth variant, the eighteenth variant, and the nineteenth variant, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that a specified stop condition is met and that there is an illegal magnetic field (specific abnormality), it controls the game to be unplayable. However, the specific abnormality is not limited to an illegal magnetic field, but may also be an illegal radio wave, an illegal vibration, a ball jam, a control error (bug), etc., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the eighth variant described above, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number) or more, the next jackpot arrival notice effect is executed, followed by a running-up effect. However, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number), the next jackpot arrival notice effect may not be executed, and only the running-up effect may be executed. Furthermore, the performance format of the running-up effect is not limited to the performance formats shown in Figures 66 (C) to 68 (B), and can be modified as appropriate as long as the process by which the difference in the number of balls goes from 78,500 (specific number) to 80,000 (reference number) is known. For example, the process by which the difference in the number of balls goes from 78,500 (specific number) to 80,000 (reference number) may be shown by a meter effect in which the meter fills up as the difference in the number of balls increases, or by a storage effect in which a specified object is stored as the difference in the number of balls increases.

In the eighth variant described above, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (a specific number) or more, a display suggesting that the reference number has been reached (a display announcing the next jackpot arrival and a running-up display) is executed until the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, and when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the celebration display shown in Figure 68 (C) is executed. However, when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more, it is also possible to execute asynchronous displays that can be recognized as a series (for example, displaying a series of videos) until the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (until game play is controlled to be impossible to play). This allows the player to recognize that the period from when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more until game play is stopped is a continuous sequence, making the process of being unable to play feel more natural.

In the eighth variant described above, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (a specific number) or more, a mini-SP reach background image g113 is displayed as a reduced-scale winning indication effect, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), showing the main character celebrating his victory in the battle. However, the presentation format of the reduced-scale winning indication effect is not limited to the one described above (mini-SP reach background image g113) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a "V" may be displayed in the lower right display area 51b. Note that when a "V" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, it is preferable that the machine is a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine or a type 2 gaming machine.

In the eighth variant described above, there are three types of jackpots: jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, and jackpot symbol Z (see Figure 12 (B)), and the specific number that triggers the start of the advance notice performance (reference number reached notice performance) is the reference number (80,000) minus the number of prize balls (1,500) that are set to be awarded in jackpot game Z. However, the specific number that triggers the start of the advance notice performance (reference number reached notice performance) may also be the reference number (80,000) minus the number of prize balls (750) that are set to be awarded in jackpot game X if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 1 (79,250), or the number of prize balls (600) that are set to be awarded in jackpot game Y if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 1 (79,400). Furthermore, the types of jackpots are not limited to three types as in the eighth modified example (see FIG. 12(B)), or four types as in the ninth and tenth modified examples (see FIG. 69), but may be one type, two types, five types or more, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the eleventh and thirteenth variants described above, it was possible to set whether or not to execute the excessive ball abnormality notification effect, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the excessive ball abnormality notification effect, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect at the opening of a jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect during a round of jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect at the ending of a jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect each time a variable effect is executed, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect every five variable effect executions, and whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect during a variable effect. However, the configurable effects are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 (the reference number) or more, a game-impossible notification effect (display of the game stop notification image shown in FIG. 28(B)) is executed to notify players that game play will become impossible. Therefore, it may be possible to set whether or not to execute this game-impossible notification effect. Alternatively, the residual ball count notification effect can be set to be executed regardless of the difference in the number of balls, or the residual ball count notification effect (advance notice effect) can be set to be executed during the customer waiting effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to arbitrarily set how often the residual ball count notification effect is executed.

In the 11th and 13th variants described above, the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notification display and the residual ball count notification display could be set by operating the normal button 40 and select button (operation means). However, the operation means for setting the display items are not limited to the normal button 40 and select button (operation means) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it would also be possible to provide dedicated operation means that are not involved in the display at all, but are used to set the display items related to the excessive ball abnormality notification display and the residual ball count notification display.

In the 11th variant described above, it was possible to set the presentation items related to the abnormal over-prize ball notification presentation and the residual ball count notification presentation, provided that RAM was cleared. However, it would also be possible to set the presentation items related to the abnormal over-prize ball notification presentation and the residual ball count notification presentation simply by turning on the power. Alternatively, it would also be possible to set the presentation items related to the abnormal over-prize ball notification presentation and the residual ball count notification presentation, provided that gaming machine slot 2 is opened.

In the 13th variant described above, it was possible to set the display items related to the abnormal over-prize ball warning display and the residual ball count notification display when the machine was in a waiting state for customers. However, it may also be possible to set the display items related to the abnormal over-prize ball warning display and the residual ball count notification display even when a variable display is being executed.

In the twelfth variant described above, when a game is disabled, the balance display unit 61 (display means) alternates between displaying a number corresponding to the number of game balls that were available for ball lending (see FIG. 78(A)) and displaying "E" indicating that ball lending is disabled (see FIG. 78(B)), every three seconds. However, when a game is disabled, the balance display unit 61 may simply display "E" indicating that ball lending is disabled. The display mode indicating that ball lending is disabled is not limited to "E" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the balance display unit 61 may display "888" (all lit) to indicate that ball lending is disabled. The display means indicating that ball lending is available and that ball lending is disabled is not limited to the balance display unit 61, but may also be the image display device 50, a sub-LCD display device, or the like.

In the 12th variant described above, when the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, a ball lending unavailable notification effect (see Figures 79 (A) and (B)) is executed to indicate that ball lending is unavailable. However, the presentation format of the ball lending unavailable notification effect is not limited to that shown in Figures 79 (A) and (B) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the presentation format of the ball lending unavailable notification effect may be to output a voice message saying "Ball lending unavailable" from the speaker 52, or to have the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 emit light in a specific lighting pattern.

In the twelfth variant described above, when the game is controlled to be unplayable, a card return suggestion effect (see Figures 79(A) and (B)) is executed to prompt the player to remove the card. However, the presentation format of the card return suggestion effect is not limited to that shown in Figures 79(A) and (B) and can be modified as appropriate. For example, the presentation format of the card return suggestion effect may be such that a voice saying "Please press the return button to remove the card" is output from the speaker 52, or the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 are illuminated in a specific lighting mode.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, it was possible to execute a current difference in ball numbers indication effect (specific measurement number effect) that suggests the current difference in ball numbers to the player (see Figure 83 (C)), and to execute a current difference in ball numbers adjustment effect to correctly show the actual difference in ball numbers (see Figure 84 (B)). In contrast to this, as in the variant shown in Figure 104, it is also possible to execute a residual difference in ball numbers indication effect (specific measurement number effect) that suggests the value (number related to the specific measurement number) obtained by subtracting the actual difference in ball numbers from 80,000 (reference number), and to execute a residual difference in ball numbers adjustment effect to correctly show the value obtained by subtracting the actual difference in ball numbers from 80,000 (reference number).

For example, as shown in Figure 104(A), in a high-probability, high-base state, the background image G105 for the probability variation is displayed, and a residual ball number indication effect is executed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The residual ball number indication effect is an effect that suggests how many more balls remain before the game is controlled to be unplayable (the over-prize ball prevention function is activated). For example, in Figure 104(A), a residual ball number indication image ZU is displayed, indicating "129 more balls remaining, excessive prize ball abnormality." The number displayed in this residual ball number indication image ZU is subtracted each time the actual difference in ball number increases (a prize ball is awarded). However, the number displayed in the residual ball number indication image ZU remains unchanged, even when the actual difference in ball number is subtracted (even when game balls are fired). Therefore, by executing the residual ball number adjustment effect, like the actual difference in ball number adjustment effect of the 14th variant, the remaining difference in balls until the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is correctly displayed.

Specifically, let's say that the game progresses from the state shown in Figure 104 (A), and a jackpot is won through the lottery on Special Chart 2. In this case, as shown in Figure 104 (B), a display is displayed showing the main character celebrating his victory in the battle, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state suggesting a jackpot. At this time, a residual ball count suggestion image ZU is displayed, indicating "110 balls remaining, excess prize balls abnormality" as an effect suggesting the residual ball count.

Next, when the jackpot game begins, the residual ball number adjustment effect is executed, as shown in Figure 104 (C). Specifically, the difference ball number adjustment image ST is displayed, and the residual ball number suggestion image ZU, which indicates "788 balls remaining increase, excessive ball abnormality," is displayed. In this way, the residual ball number adjustment effect switches the number shown in the residual ball number suggestion image ZU from "110" to "788," and the number of game balls fired by the player in the high probability, high base state is subtracted. This makes it possible for the player to correctly grasp the remaining difference in the number of balls until the excessive ball prevention function is activated, at the time the jackpot game begins. After that, as shown in Figure 104 (D), a bonus acquisition image BK indicating "BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 50a as an opening effect.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, the current difference in ball count adjustment effect is executed when the jackpot game starts or ends (see Figure 83 (B) and Figure 84 (B)). However, the timing when the current difference in ball count adjustment effect is executed is not limited to the above-mentioned timing and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the current difference in ball count adjustment effect may be executed during the opening of the jackpot game or when the opening ends, during a round of the jackpot game or when the ending of the jackpot game starts. The current difference in ball count adjustment effect may also be executed when transitioning to a customer waiting state or during the execution of a variable effect. The current difference in ball count adjustment effect may also be executed when a certain amount of time has passed or when the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches a certain number. The execution timing of the above-mentioned residual ball count adjustment effect can also be changed as appropriate, and may be executed at the timing shown in the examples above.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, the current difference in ball count indication effect continues to be executed regardless of the game state once it has started, as long as the actual difference in ball count does not fall below 78,500 (the lower limit for the effect). However, the current difference in ball count indication effect may be executed only in a jackpot game state (advantageous game state). This makes it possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the difference in ball count when the actual difference in ball count decreases significantly, as occurs when the game is controlled in a normal game state. Alternatively, the current difference in ball count indication effect may be executed only in a jackpot game state and a high-probability high-base state (advantageous game state), or only in a jackpot game state and a high-probability low-base state (advantageous game state). Alternatively, it may be executed only in a jackpot game state and a small win rush state (advantageous game state), or only in a jackpot game state and a time-saving state (advantageous game state). Furthermore, even in the residual ball number suggestion effect described above, the game state in which it is executed can be changed as appropriate, and it may be executed in the game state exemplified above.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, the current difference in balls suggestion effect is set to start when the actual difference in balls reaches 78,500 or more. However, the actual difference in balls value that triggers the start of the current difference in balls suggestion effect is not limited to 78,500 and can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, for example, it may be set to start when the actual difference in balls reaches 75,000 or more. However, it is best to set the current difference in balls suggestion effect to start when it is at least half of the reference number of 80,000 (in this case, 40,000 or more). In this way, if the actual difference in balls is not close enough to the reference number (80,000), the current difference in balls suggestion effect will not start, preventing the player from becoming overly conscious of the difference in balls. Note that the actual difference in balls value that triggers the start of the above-mentioned residual difference in balls suggestion effect can also be changed as appropriate.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, in the current difference in ball number indication effect, if the actual difference in ball number increases, the number shown in the current difference in ball number indication image ZT increases, and if the actual difference in ball number decreases, the number shown in the current difference in ball number indication image ZT does not change. However, in the current difference in ball number indication effect, if the actual difference in ball number increases, the number shown in the current difference in ball number indication image ZT may or may not increase. Also, in the current difference in ball number indication effect, if the actual difference in ball number decreases, the number shown in the current difference in ball number indication image ZT may or may not decrease. Note that in the above-mentioned residual difference in ball number indication effect, if the actual difference in ball number increases, the number shown in the residual difference in ball number indication image ZU may or may not decrease. Also, in the residual difference in ball number indication effect, if the actual difference in ball number decreases, the number shown in the current difference in ball number indication image ZT may or may not increase.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, the number related to the difference in the number of balls is shown by displaying the current difference in the number of balls indication image ZT, but the number related to the difference in the number of balls may also be shown by sound from the speaker 52 or by the illumination of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54. In another variant, the number related to the difference in the number of balls is shown by displaying the residual difference in the number of balls indication image ZU, but the number related to the difference in the number of balls may also be shown by sound from the speaker 52 or by the illumination of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54. As in the 11th variant, it may also be possible for an arcade employee to set whether or not to execute the current difference in the number of balls indication effect and the residual difference in the number of balls indication effect.

In the above-mentioned 14th variant, after the current difference in balls indication effect is executed, the current difference in balls adjustment effect is executed, but it is also possible to not execute the current difference in balls adjustment effect. Also, after the residual difference in balls indication effect is executed, the residual difference in balls adjustment effect is executed, but it is also possible to not execute the residual difference in balls adjustment effect. In short, while the current difference in balls indication effect or residual difference in balls indication effect (specific measurement number effect) that shows a number related to the difference in balls is executed, the current difference in balls adjustment effect or residual difference in balls adjustment effect that corrects the value of the difference in balls shown in the current difference in balls indication effect or residual difference in balls indication effect may not be executed.

In the fifteenth variant described above, after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the input reflection image NP is displayed (the special operation effect is executed) as a special operation effect by operating the select button and normal button 40 (predetermined operation means) (see Figure 87 (D)). However, the special operation effect executed after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated is not limited to the display of the input reflection image NP, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special operation effect may be executed as in the variant shown in Figure 105.

That is, suppose the difference in ball count is 80,000 or more, and a game stop warning effect (display of game stop warning image YT) is executed at the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 105(A). After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game is disabled. As a result, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a character image OG showing a sad character is displayed as a character appearance effect. At this time, an over-prize ball abnormality notification image KF displaying the words "Over-prize ball abnormality" is also displayed as an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 105(B), while the character image OG is displayed, an operation prompting effect is executed in the lower right corner of the display screen 50a, encouraging the player to press the normal button 40. Specifically, in the operation prompting effect, a press prompt image BS showing the shape of the normal button 40 and the words "Press!" is displayed. Thus, when the player presses the normal button 40 while the press prompt image BS is displayed, an achievement effect is executed as a special operation effect, as shown in FIG. 105(C). That is, an achievement image OF is displayed, showing the words "Congratulations on hitting 80,000 shots" and a happy character. In this way, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the achievement effect is executed by having the player press the normal button 40. This makes it possible to have the player participate in the effect and enjoy the game even after it has become impossible to play.

In the fifteenth variant described above, the special operation effect executed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated displays the input reflection image NP on the display screen 50a. However, the presentation format of the special operation effect is not limited to the above and can be modified as appropriate. For example, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, when the player presses the normal button 40, the special operation effect may include repeatedly outputting a voice message saying "Congratulations on achieving 80,000 shots" from the speaker 52, or the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k (see FIG. 5) moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 5(A) to the operating position shown in FIG. 5(B). Alternatively, the special operation effect may include moving a frame movable body (e.g., frame movable device 58) provided on the gaming machine frame 2 from its initial position to its operating position, or causing the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special lighting mode. In this way, by continuing to execute the special operation effect as described above after the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated, it is possible to appeal to other players that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated. Here, the predetermined operation means that triggers the execution of the special operation effect is not limited to the normal button 40 or the select button, but can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the special button 41 (see Figure 1). Note that, after the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated, the effect as described above may continue to be executed even if the player does not operate the predetermined operation means.

In the fifteenth variant described above, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in Figure 87 (B), the achievement effect displays an achievement image OF (achievement image) showing the words "Congratulations on reaching 80,000 shots" and a happy character. However, the display mode of the achievement image is not limited to that described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display mode of the achievement image may be such that a special rare character, special rare item, or special rare line that would not be displayed before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is displayed.

In the fifteenth variant described above, after the over-prize ball prevention function was activated, the character input effect was executed as shown in Figure 87 (C). However, the timing of the character input effect execution can be changed as appropriate, and can be executed before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. For example, the character input effect can be executed during the ending of the jackpot game that triggered the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function. Alternatively, the character input effect can be executed during the execution of a customer waiting effect or a variable effect.

In the fifteenth variant described above, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the power is turned on, the input reflection image NP is displayed as a special operation effect during the execution of the customer waiting effect (see FIG. 88(B)). However, the timing at which the input reflection image NP is displayed after the power is turned on and the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated is not limited to during the execution of the customer waiting effect and can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be during the ending of a jackpot game. As in the eleventh variant, it is also possible for an arcade employee to set whether or not the special operation effect (display of the input reflection image NP shown in FIG. 87(D)) will be executed immediately after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, or whether or not the special operation effect (display of the input reflection image NP shown in FIG. 88(B)) will be executed after the power is turned on and the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the 16th variant described above, when the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the special effects (effects after abnormal excessive prize ball activation) include a special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B)), a special cut-in preview effect (see Figure 90 (B-2)), a special opening effect (see Figures 91 (B-2) (C-2)), and a special customer waiting demo effect (see Figure 92 (B-2)). However, the special effects are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate.

For example, the special effects may be, as special reach effects, special reach development effects that develop into reach effects, or special full rotation reach effects in which the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lined up in a row and change at the same speed. Furthermore, as special preview effects, the special effects may be, as special preview effects, special step-up preview effects in which the winning expectancy increases step by step, special story preview effects in which a special story unfolds as a video, special hold change preview effects in which the icon TA changes to a special mode, special movable body drive preview effects in which the board movable body (above-board movable body 55k, below-board movable body 56k) or frame movable body (e.g., frame movable device 58) moves in a special mode, special vibration preview effects in which the normal button 40 vibrates in a special mode, or special change start preview effects executed at the start of the display of the changing special symbols. Furthermore, as special win effects, the special effects may be, as special round effects executed during round play of a jackpot game, or special ending effects executed at the end of a jackpot game. The special effect may also be a special customer waiting effect, in which the display mode of the stopped effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is a special display mode.

In the 16th variant described above, when the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, the presentation control microcomputer 121 is configured to enable the execution of a special presentation (presentation after abnormal activation of excessive prize balls) if operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the presentation RAM 124. However, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may also be configured to enable the execution of a special presentation (presentation after abnormal activation of excessive prize balls) on the condition that the control that prevents play from being executed after power is turned on is released, regardless of whether operation information indicating that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the presentation RAM 124.

In the 16th variant described above, the special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B)) executed as the special reach effect was an effect indicating that a jackpot had been confirmed. However, the special reach effect may also be an effect indicating that a jackpot has not been confirmed, but that the likelihood of winning a jackpot is somewhat high (for example, the likelihood of winning is 50%).

In the 16th variant described above, the special cut-in preview effect (see Figure 90 (B-2)) executed as the special preview effect was an effect indicating that a jackpot had been confirmed. However, the special preview effect may also be an effect suggesting that a jackpot has not been confirmed, but that the likelihood of winning a jackpot is somewhat high (for example, the expected likelihood of winning is 50%). The special preview effect may also simply be a preview effect suggesting that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated in the past.

In the 16th variant described above, the special opening effect (see Figure 91 (B-2) (C-2)) executed as the special winning effect was an effect indicating that a V-long jackpot (jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Z1) had been won, that is, an effect indicating that a transition to a high probability state was essentially confirmed as long as the game was being played correctly. However, the special winning effect may also be an effect indicating that a bonus other than a transition to a high probability state (for example, the execution of 10 rounds of jackpot play) will be awarded. Note that the special winning effect may not indicate that a bonus will be awarded, but may simply be an effect suggesting that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated previously.

In the above-described sixteenth variant, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, activation information indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124. Alternatively, activation count information (activation information) indicating the number of times the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated may be stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124 each time the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In this case, for example, if activation count information indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated once is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124, the presentation control microcomputer 121 enables the execution of a first special effect that would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Furthermore, if activation count information indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated twice is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124, the presentation control microcomputer 121 enables the execution of a second special effect, which would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated, rather than the first special effect. Furthermore, if activation count information indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated three times is stored in the non-erasable memory area of the effect RAM 124, the effect control microcomputer 121 will execute the third special effect, which would not be executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated, instead of the first or second special effect. In this way, special effects (first, second, or third special effects) are executed according to the number of times the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, providing a novel gaming experience for players by allowing them to understand the number of times the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated based on the type of special effect. As in the eleventh variation, an arcade employee may be able to set whether or not special effects (special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B)), special cut-in preview effect (see FIG. 90(B-2)), special opening effect (see FIGS. 91(B-2) and (C-2)), and special customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 92(B-2))) will be executed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

Furthermore, if activation count information (activation information) indicating the number of times the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is stored in a non-erasable memory area of the presentation RAM 124 each time the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, the following may be executed. That is, the presentation modes of predetermined presentations (e.g., reach presentations, preview presentations, jackpot presentations, etc.) are assumed to be a first presentation mode, a second presentation mode, a third presentation mode, and a fourth presentation mode. For example, if the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines that the excess prize ball prevention function has never been activated, it executes the predetermined presentation so that the allocation rate for the first presentation mode is 25%, the allocation rate for the second presentation mode is 25%, the allocation rate for the third presentation mode is 25%, and the allocation rate for the fourth presentation mode is 25%. Furthermore, if activation count information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated once is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a predetermined performance such that the allocation rate for the first performance mode is 10%, the allocation rate for the second performance mode is 20%, the allocation rate for the third performance mode is 30%, and the allocation rate for the fourth performance mode is 40%. Furthermore, if activation count information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated twice is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a predetermined performance such that the allocation rate for the first performance mode is 40%, the allocation rate for the second performance mode is 30%, the allocation rate for the third performance mode is 20%, and the allocation rate for the fourth performance mode is 10%. Thus, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the player feels that the first, second, third, and fourth effect patterns appear to an equal extent, the player will infer that the over-prize ball prevention function has never been activated. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the player feels that the first, second, third, and fourth effect patterns appear frequently, the player will infer that the over-prize ball prevention function has only been activated once. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the player feels that the fourth, third, and second effect patterns appear frequently, the player will infer that the over-prize ball prevention function has only been activated twice. These variations make it possible to provide a novel gaming experience by requiring the player to guess the number of times the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

In the above-described 17th variant, if the over-prize ball prevention function activates to disable game play and the disabled game play continues after the power is turned on, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (alarm means) displays a red background image RE and an over-prize ball abnormality image KRX, the speaker 52 (alarm means) outputs a voice message stating "The over-prize ball abnormality has not been resolved. Please clear the RAM," and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 (alarm means) all flash red. However, the alarm means indicating that the disabled game play continues after the power is turned on is not limited to the image display device 50, speaker 52 (sound output means), frame lamp 53, and board lamp 54 (light-emitting means) and can be modified as appropriate. For example, a movable frame member (alarm means) is provided on the upper decorative body 31 of the gaming machine frame 2. The movable frame member is movable from an initial position to an operating position that is above the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 2. In this case, if the excessive prize ball prevention function activates to disable a game and the disablement continues after the power is turned on, the movable frame body may move from the initial position to the operating position and remain in the operating position. This allows arcade employees to easily determine that the disablement has not been lifted by observing the movable frame body moving above the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 2 before business hours begin. Furthermore, for example, the normal button 40 (alert means) may be configured to vibrate in a special manner. In this case, if the excessive prize ball prevention function activates to disable a game and the disablement continues after the power is turned on, the normal button 40 may continue to vibrate in a special manner. This allows arcade employees to easily determine that the disablement has not been lifted by observing the normal button 40 continuing to vibrate in a special manner before business hours begin.

In the above-described 17th variant, if the game is disabled due to the detection of an improper magnetic field (a specific abnormality is determined), and the disabled game continues after the power is turned on, a blue background image BL and a magnetic abnormality maintenance image KR1 are displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (alarm means), a voice message stating "Magnetic detection abnormality not resolved. Please clear RAM" is output from the speaker 52 (alarm means), and the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 (alarm means) all flash blue. However, the alarm means indicating that the game continues to be disabled after the power is turned on is not limited to the image display device 50, speaker 52 (sound output means), frame lamp 53, and board lamp 54 (light-emitting means) and can be modified as appropriate. For example, a movable frame member (alarm means) is provided on the upper decorative body 31 of the gaming machine frame 2. The movable frame member is movable from an initial position to an operating position that is above the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 2. In this case, if a specific abnormality is detected (e.g., unauthorized magnetism is detected) and the game is disabled, and the disabled state continues after the power is turned on, the movable frame body may move from its initial position to its operating position and remain in the operating position. This allows arcade employees to easily determine that the disabled state has not been lifted by observing the movable frame body moving above the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 2 before business hours begin. Furthermore, for example, the normal button 40 (alert means) may be configured to vibrate in a special manner. In this case, if a specific abnormality is detected (e.g., unauthorized magnetism is detected) and the disabled state continues after the power is turned on, the normal button 40 may continue to vibrate in a special manner. This allows arcade employees to easily determine that the disabled state has not been lifted by observing the normal button 40 continuing to vibrate in a special manner before business hours begin.

In the 17th variant described above, the special abnormality modes indicating that the control that disabled play was continuing included the display of the over-prize ball abnormality maintenance image kRX, the output of a voice message saying "The over-prize ball abnormality has not been resolved. Please clear RAM," the flashing red light of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54, the display of the magnetic abnormality maintenance image KR1, the output of a voice message saying "The magnetic detection abnormality has not been resolved. Please clear RAM," and the flashing blue light of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54. However, the special abnormality modes are not limited to those described above and can be modified as appropriate. For example, the special abnormality mode may be such that the on-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable device 56 continue to move between the initial position shown in FIG. 5(A) and the operating position shown in FIG. 5(B).

In the 18th variant described above, as shown in FIG. 95, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the ball jam prevention mode is set (the game movable member is moved) on the condition that RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on. However, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the ball jam prevention mode may be set regardless of whether RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on. In other words, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the game movable member may be moved simply by turning on the power switch 193, without pressing the RAM clear switch 191.

In the above-mentioned 18th variant, as shown in FIG. 95, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode was pressing the RAM clear switch 191. However, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode is not limited to pressing the RAM clear switch 191 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode may be operation of an operating means other than the RAM clear switch 191 (e.g., the setting key cylinder 180, the special reset switch 181, etc.). The condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode may also be the passage of a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) since the ball-biting prevention mode was initiated, or the opening and closing operations of the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chute opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) with respect to the ball entry portions (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15, second starting opening 12, specific area 16) a specified number of times (e.g., five times). The ball jam prevention mode only needs to be executed from the time the power is turned on until the jackpot determination process (S1402, S1408) is started for the first time (from the time the power is turned on until the display of the special symbol changes for the first time).

In the 18th variant described above, as shown in Figure 95, the ball jamming prevention mode was set after RAM clearing was performed. However, the ball jamming prevention mode may also be set before RAM clearing is initiated or while RAM clearing is being performed (the game movable member may be moved).

In the 19th variant described above, as shown in Figure 99, the ball jamming prevention mode was set as soon as game play was disabled. However, it would also be possible to set the ball jamming prevention mode once a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since game play was disabled. In this case, the specified time allows time for all game balls to be completely discharged from the game area 6 before the game movable member can be moved.

In the 19th variant described above, as shown in Figure 99, after game play is disabled, the ball-trap prevention mode is automatically set without requiring any operation by an amusement facility employee. However, after game play is disabled, the ball-trap prevention mode may be set on the condition that an amusement facility employee operates an operating means (e.g., RAM clear switch 191, setting key cylinder 180, special reset switch 181, etc.) or opens the game machine frame 2. In this way, it is possible to prevent players from seeing, as much as possible, the movement of the game movable parts due to the setting of the ball-trap prevention mode.

In the 19th variant described above, as shown in FIG. 95, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode was the passage of a specified time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the ball-biting prevention mode was initiated. However, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode is not limited to the above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode may be an amusement facility employee operating an operating means (e.g., RAM clear switch 191, setting key cylinder 180, special reset switch 181, etc.). The condition for terminating the ball-biting prevention mode may also be the execution of a specified number of opening and closing operations (e.g., five times) of the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chute opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) on the ball entry sections (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15, second starting opening 12, specific area 16).

In the 19th variant described above, the ball-sticking prevention mode is always set if a game is disabled. However, the ball-sticking prevention mode may be set only if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that ball sticking has occurred after disabling a game. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to determine whether the number of game balls entering the game area 6 matches the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6. If the number of game balls entering the game area 6 matches the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 after disabling a game, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that ball sticking has not occurred and does not set the ball-sticking prevention mode. On the other hand, if the number of game balls entering the game area 6 does not match the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 after disabling a game, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that ball sticking has occurred and sets the ball-sticking prevention mode. In this way, the ball jamming prevention mode is set only in situations where there is a high possibility of ball jamming after game play has been controlled to be unplayable, making it possible to prevent the movement of the movable game member from being seen by the player as much as possible. As a method for counting the number of game balls entering the game area 6, for example, a return ball prevention section may be provided at the upper end of the inner wall section 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls may be provided in this return ball prevention section. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 may count the number of game balls entering the game area 6 based on detection by the sensor. As a method for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6, for example, the game control microcomputer may count the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 based on detection by an outlet sensor.

Here, as described above, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of game balls entering the game area 6 does not match the number of game balls ejected from the game area 6 and sets the ball-sticking prevention mode, the termination condition for the ball-sticking prevention mode may be as follows: That is, the termination condition for the ball-sticking prevention mode may be that the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of game balls entering the game area 6 matches the number of game balls ejected from the game area 6. Alternatively, the termination condition for the ball-sticking prevention mode may be that the opening and closing operations of the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chute opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) with respect to the ball entry portions (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15, second starting opening 12, specific area 16) are performed a specified number of times (e.g., five times). In this case, if the number of game balls entering the game area 6 does not match the number of game balls ejected from the game area 6 even after the opening and closing operation of the ball entry part of the game movable member is performed the specified number of times, the presentation control microcomputer 121 should execute a presentation indicating that the ball jamming has not been resolved.

In the above-mentioned 18th and 19th variants, in the ball jam prevention mode, the opening and closing operations of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, the VAT opening and closing member 15k, the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k are executed in parallel (simultaneously). However, the opening and closing operations of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k, the VAT opening and closing member 15k, the electric chute opening and closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k may each be executed at different times. For example, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, the opening and closing operation of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k is first started, and after the opening and closing operation of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the VAT opening and closing member 15k is started, after the opening and closing operation of the VAT opening and closing member 15k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the electric chute opening and closing member 12k is started, after the opening and closing operation of the electric chute opening and closing member 12k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the diverting member 16k is started, after the opening and closing operation of the diverting member 16k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the normal AT opening and closing member 14k is started, and the above opening and closing operations may be repeated thereafter.

In the 18th and 19th variants described above, when a gaming ball passes through the specific area 16, the system is configured to transition to a high probability state after a jackpot game. Alternatively, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) may be executed when a gaming ball passes through the specific area 16. In this case, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, detection by the specific area sensor 16a is disabled. Therefore, when the ball jamming prevention mode is set, the distribution member 16k performs an opening and closing operation relative to the specific area 16, making it possible to prevent a jackpot game from being executed even if a gaming ball passes through the specific area 16.

In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference in the number of balls (specific measurement number) is 80,000 (reference number) or more. However, the difference in the number of balls (reference number) that serves as the reference for activating the over-prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, 120,000, or the like, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the specific measured number that triggers the over-prize ball prevention function is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls fired. However, the specific measured number can be changed as appropriate, as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, from the perspective of not awarding excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measured number may be the difference in the number of balls limited to a certain game state, such as a jackpot game state, or a certain period, such as a consecutive winning period. Also, for example, the specific measured number may be the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state, such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period, such as a consecutive winning period. Also, for example, the specific measured number may be a base across all game states, a base limited to a certain game state, such as a jackpot game state, or a base limited to a certain period, such as a consecutive winning period.

In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described variations, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is configured as a non-enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls contained therein flow down the play area 6 and are then discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. However, the pachinko gaming machine may also be configured as an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls contained therein flow down the play area and then circulate and re-enter the play area. In this case, a 7-segment display is disposed on the frame control board, which corresponds to the payout control board 170. Therefore, the 7-segment display may be configured to display the difference in the number of balls (specific measurement number). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 106, a 6-digit 7-segment display 200 that displays the number of balls held may be disposed below the front door, and the difference in the number of balls (specific measurement number) may be displayed on this 7-segment display 200.

In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the excessive prize ball prevention function has been explained as being activated when the difference in balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls, becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the information on the difference in balls stored in the difference in balls memory unit 107c has been cleared (i.e., non-deletion clearing process). However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may also be activated when the value measured as the maximum difference in balls (also called the maximum balls held, MY, etc.) becomes equal to a predetermined reference number. In other words, the specific measured number may be the maximum difference in balls. Here, the maximum difference in balls will be explained using Figure 107. Figures 107(A) to (C) each show an example of the change in the difference in balls and an example of the maximum difference in balls calculated according to the change in each difference in balls.

Figure 107(A) shows an example in which the difference in number of balls changes without updating the minimum difference in number of balls after the first minimum difference in number of balls is recorded. The minimum difference in number of balls is the lowest value of the measured difference in number of balls. Specifically, in Figure 107(A), after the previous non-deletion clearing process was performed, the difference in number of balls trended downward, and the minimum difference in number of balls of "-10,000" was recorded at time tA1. After that, the difference in number of balls increases and decreases, but does not decrease below the minimum difference in number of balls at time tA1. Then, at time tA2, which is later than time tA1, a peak difference in number of balls of "70,000" is recorded. The peak difference in number of balls is the highest value of the difference in number of balls after the minimum difference in number of balls is measured. The maximum difference in number of balls MYA in the example of Figure 107(A) is "80,000," which is the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls of "-10,000" at time tA1 and the peak difference in number of balls of "70,000" at time tA2.

In the example of Figure 107 (A), the minimum difference in number of balls is on a decreasing trend until time tA1, so it is updated multiple times as the difference in number of balls decreases. However, since the minimum difference in number of balls never falls below the minimum difference in number of balls at time tA1 thereafter, the minimum difference in number of balls is not updated after time tA1.

Figure 107(B) shows an example in which the difference in number of balls changes as the minimum difference in number of balls is updated multiple times. In this example, after the previous non-deletion clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference in number of balls, "-10,000," is recorded at time tB1. At time tB4, a minimum difference in number of balls, "-20,000," smaller than the difference in number of balls at time tB1, "-10,000," is recorded. At time tB7, a minimum difference in number of balls, "-30,000," smaller than the difference in number of balls at time tB4, is recorded. Between time tB1 and time tB4 in Figure 107(B), a peak difference in number of balls, "20,000," is recorded at time tB2. Between time tB4 and time tB7, a peak difference in number of balls, "0," is recorded at time tB5. At time tB8, later than time tB7, a peak difference in number of balls, "50,000," is recorded. In the example of Figure 107 (B), the maximum difference in number of balls MYB is "80,000", which is the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls at time tB7, "-30,000", and the peak difference in number of balls at time tB8, "50,000".

In the example of Figure 107 (B), the minimum difference in number of balls is on a decreasing trend until time tB1, so it is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the difference in number of balls. Also, between time tB3 and time tB4, the difference in number of balls is smaller than the difference in number of balls at time tB1, which was the previous minimum difference in number of balls, and is on a decreasing trend, so it is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the difference in number of balls. Furthermore, between time tB6 and time tB7, the minimum difference in number of balls is smaller than the difference in number of balls at time tB4, which was the previous minimum difference in number of balls, and is on a decreasing trend, so it is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the difference in number of balls.

Figure 107(C) shows an example in which the difference in number of balls remains negative. In this example, after the previous non-deletion clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference in number of balls, "-30,000," was recorded at time tC1. At time tC4, a minimum difference in number of balls, "-50,000," smaller than the minimum difference in number of balls, "-30,000," recorded at time tC1, was recorded. Between time tC1 and time tC4 in Figure 107(C), a peak difference in number of balls, "-10,000," was recorded at time tC2. At time tC5, after time tC4, a peak difference in number of balls, "-10,000," was recorded. The maximum difference in number of balls MYC in the example of Figure 107(C) is "40,000," which is the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls, "-50,000," at time tC4, and the peak difference in number of balls, "-10,000," at time tC5.

In the example of Figure 107 (C), the minimum difference in number of balls is on a decreasing trend until time tC1, so it is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the difference in number of balls. Furthermore, between time tC3 and time tC4, the minimum difference in number of balls is smaller than the previous minimum difference in number of balls at time tC1, and is on a decreasing trend, so it is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the difference in number of balls.

As described above, the maximum difference in number of balls is calculated as the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls, which is the lowest value of the measured difference in number of balls, and the peak (highest value) of the difference in number of balls after the minimum difference in number of balls is measured. The excessive prize ball prevention function can be activated when the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls and the difference in number of balls measured after the minimum difference in number of balls is recorded reaches a predetermined reference number. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function can be activated when the increase in the difference in number of balls from the minimum difference in number of balls reaches a predetermined reference number. The excessive prize ball prevention function can also be activated when the maximum difference in number of balls reaches a predetermined reference number.

Specifically, for example, the excessive prize ball prevention function could store the minimum difference in number of balls in a specified memory area, calculate the difference between the stored minimum difference in number of balls and the current (latest) difference in number of balls, and activate when this calculated value reaches a predetermined reference number. Information on the minimum difference in number of balls and information on the calculated value of the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls and the current difference in number of balls can be stored in a specified memory area (non-erasable memory unit 107) of the gaming RAM 104. These values can then be cleared (i.e., set to their initial values) when the difference in number of balls is cleared in a specified non-erasable clear process.

Furthermore, if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated when the difference between the minimum difference in number of balls and the difference in number of balls measured after the minimum difference in number of balls is recorded reaches a predetermined reference number, i.e., if the specific measurement number is the increase in the difference in number of balls from the minimum difference in number of balls, a counter for counting the specific measurement number may be provided. Such a counter may, for example, always perform addition based on the number of prize balls regardless of the value, and perform subtraction based on the number of balls fired when the number is greater than "0." If the difference in number of balls is "0" or less, subtraction based on the number of balls fired is not performed. The value of such a counter fluctuates as an integer greater than "0." This counter may be referred to as the ball difference natural number counter. Information on the ball difference natural number counter may also be stored in a specified memory area (non-erasable memory unit 107) of the gaming RAM 104. The value of the ball difference natural number counter may then be cleared (i.e., set to its initial value) by a process equivalent to a specified non-erasable clear process (the process that clears the ball difference in the above embodiment).

An example of the change in the value of the ball difference natural number counter is explained using Figure 108. Figures 108(A) to (C) each show the change in the value of the ball difference natural number counter. The change in the value of the ball difference natural number counter shown in Figures 108(A) to (C) corresponds to the change in the number of ball difference in Figures 108(A) to (C), respectively.

As shown in Figures 108 (A) to (C), the value of the ball difference natural number counter is "0" while the minimum number of balls difference is being updated. The ball difference natural number counter can count the increase in the number of balls difference from the minimum number of balls difference using natural numbers. Therefore, by using the ball difference natural number counter, it is possible to ensure that the excessive prize ball prevention function functions properly. Furthermore, a ball difference natural number counter that always remains above "0" can easily calculate the minimum value required for the excessive prize ball prevention function to operate. Furthermore, using a value less than "0" can result in a large amount of information being required for calculations by the game control microcomputer 101. In such cases, by using a ball difference natural number counter that always remains above "0", it is possible to reduce the load on the game control microcomputer 101.

In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the game control microcomputer 101 disabled the game when the difference in the number of balls reached 80,000 (reference number) or more. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may measure (count) the difference in the number of balls, but may not disable the game based on the difference in the number of balls. In this specification, "measure" has the same meaning as "count" or "tally."

12. Inventions Described in the Above-described Embodiments The above-described embodiments describe the inventions of the following means. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding component names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to these additions.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) and an advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see Figure 25), the game is controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and launch control process are stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or exceeds the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, the player does not suddenly have their game stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and does not experience any significant disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means A2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) transitions to a normal gaming state, the game is controlled so that it cannot be played.

With this type of gaming machine, if the specific measurement number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or exceeds the reference number and the game transitions from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop playing at a time that is convenient for them.

The invention according to means A3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
The game control means
When a win is determined by the win determination process, a win game (jackpot game) can be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and a predetermined number (for example, four) of the hit determination processes that have been reserved when the advantageous gaming state is transitioned to the normal gaming state are consumed in the normal gaming state, the game is controlled so that it cannot be executed (see Figure 53).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, a predetermined number of hit determination processes may be held in abeyance when the game transitions from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. In this case, the game state is considered to be essentially advantageous until the predetermined number of held hit determination processes are consumed in the normal game state, and once the essentially advantageous game state ends, the game can be stopped.

The invention according to means A4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
Equipped with a ball entry port (second starting port 12),
The game control means can control the game ball into an easy-to-enter state (high base state) in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry hole than in a normal game state,
This is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy-to-score state (high base state).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, once the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-score state, in which it is easier for a gaming ball to score in the scoring slot than in the normal gaming state, ends, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, players can stop playing before they reach a point where their balls start to decrease after the easy-to-score state ends.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means A1 to A4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and when the specific measurement number is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ends, it controls the game to be disabled. This makes it possible to solve (achieve) the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
When the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process may be stopped) (see FIG. 25).
This gaming machine is characterized in that it erases the specific measurement number (see Figures 26 (A) and (B)) when a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on (a first reset condition in which the special reset switch 181 is pressed, and a second reset condition in which the waiting state for customers continues for one hour) is met.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific count based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a player stops playing before the specific count reaches the reference number, and a later player starts playing and the specific count exceeds the reference number immediately, a terrible situation can occur. Therefore, the measured specific count is erased when a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on is met. This prevents later players from having to stop playing immediately after starting, making it possible to prevent terrible situations.

The invention according to means B2 is as follows:
a special operation means (special reset switch 181) that can be operated;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 26(A)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a player has finished playing, an amusement center employee can operate a special operating means to erase the specific count that was measured. This makes it possible for players who play later to avoid having to stop playing immediately after starting.

The invention according to means B3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
The game control means can control the machine to wait for customers after stopping and displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) that indicates the result of the winning determination process,
The reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 26(B)).

With a gaming machine configured this way, if the waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, it is assumed that the player has changed, and the specific count that has been measured is erased. This makes it possible for players who play later to avoid having to stop playing immediately after starting.

The invention according to means B4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is a transition from an advantageous gaming state (high probability, high base state) that is advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state (see Figure 81 (A)).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, when a game state that is advantageous to the player transitions to a normal game state, the specific count is erased. In this way, once the advantageous game state ends, it is possible to prevent the specific count from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means B5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
The reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal gaming state (see Figure 65 (B)).

With a gaming machine configured this way, if a specific time continues in normal play mode, it means that the player has not been in an advantageous position for a while. Therefore, in this case, by erasing the specific measurement number, it is possible to prevent the specific measurement number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means B1 to B5 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, may control the game to be unplayable when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number, and erases the measured specific measurement number when a reset condition is met that is not triggered by power-on. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with an operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process may be stopped).
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the power is turned on, game information related to the game is erased (RAM is cleared) based on the operation of the specific operation means, but the specific measurement number that has been measured is not erased.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when the specific count based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, when an amusement center employee operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, game information related to the game is erased, but the measured specific count is not erased. Therefore, even in situations during business hours when the game status related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like, it is possible to prevent the measured specific count from being erased.

The invention according to means C2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C1,
a special operation means (special reset switch 181) that can be operated;
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific count that has been measured can be erased based on the operation of the special operation means (see Figure 26 (A)).

With this type of gaming machine, the measured specific number can be erased by an amusement center employee operating the special operating means. This allows the amusement center employee to erase the measured specific number at any time without erasing the game status related to the game.

The invention according to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or C2,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it is determined that a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 AM) has arrived, the specific count that has been measured can be erased.

With this type of gaming machine, the specific count is erased at a predetermined reference time. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the specific count without requiring operation by an amusement center employee.

The invention according to means C4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game control means
The specific measurement numbers are stored in order by dividing the specific measurement numbers into 1st to N(4)th predetermined periods (periods from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off),
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in conjunction with erasing the specific measurement number for the Nth predetermined period, the specific measurement numbers for the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods are shifted to become the specific measurement numbers for the second to Nth predetermined periods, and measurement of the specific measurement number for the first predetermined period is started.

With this gaming machine configuration, it is possible to store the specific measurement numbers for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth. Then, as the specific measurement number for the Nth predetermined period is erased, the specific measurement numbers for the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods are shifted to become the specific measurement numbers for the second to the Nth predetermined periods. Then, the measurement of the specific measurement number for the first predetermined period begins. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the specific measurement numbers for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth, without requiring operation by an amusement center employee.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not take measures to prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means C1 to C4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and may control the game to be unplayable when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number. When the power is turned on, game information related to the game is erased when a specific operation means is operated, but the measured specific measurement number is not erased. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of achieving this).

<Means D>
The invention according to means D1 is
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number in an advantageous game state (jackpot game state and high probability high base state) advantageous to the player, advantageous effects (round effects shown in FIG. 18(C-2) and probability variable mode effects shown in FIG. 18(B-4)) can be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number in the advantageous game state, an alternative effect (a round alternative effect shown in Figure 63 (B) and a special mode alternative effect shown in Figure 63 (C)) can be executed in place of the advantageous effect.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if an advantageous effect is being executed when the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number in an advantageous play state, this may give the player the impression that they can still continue playing. Therefore, by executing an alternative effect in place of the advantageous effect in this case, it is possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which play becomes impossible.

The invention according to means D2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means D1,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state and high probability high base state) ends, the game is controlled to be unplayable (see Figure 25).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, play is not disabled as long as the machine is in an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, if an advantageous effect were to remain active in an advantageous gaming state, there is a risk that the player might be misled into thinking that the specific measurement number has not yet reached the reference number. Therefore, if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state, an alternative effect is executed in place of the advantageous effect, allowing the player to continue playing while still reliably understanding that the specific measurement number has reached the reference number.

The invention according to means D3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means D2,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game when it determines that a winning has occurred through the winning determination process,
The advantageous game state (the game state during the advantageous period shown in FIG. 53 (jackpot game state, high base state, normal game state in the lottery of special chart 2)) ends when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the predetermined number (for example, 4) of the hit determination processes that were reserved when the game transitioned to the normal game state are consumed in the normal game state.
This gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous effect includes an effect (a special effect replacing remaining reserves shown in Figure 56) that is executed when the hit determination process that was reserved for a predetermined number (for example, 4) when the game transitioned to the normal game state is consumed in the normal game state.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, play will not become impossible until the win determination process that was reserved for a predetermined number of times when the machine transitioned to normal game mode has been completed. If the machine transitioned to normal game mode and the advantageous effect was still being executed, the player might be misled into thinking that the specific measurement number has not yet reached the reference number. Therefore, by executing an alternative effect in place of the advantageous effect after the transition to normal game mode, the player can be sure that the specific measurement number has reached the reference number.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means D1 to D3 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number, and the presentation control means is capable of executing an advantageous presentation when the specific measurement number is less than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and is capable of executing an alternative presentation in place of the advantageous presentation when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of achieving this).

<Means E>
The invention according to means E1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) and a predetermined termination condition is met in the normal game state (for example, when the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 30 since transitioning to the normal game state, see Figure 57), the game is controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and launch control process are stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or exceeds the reference number and a predetermined termination condition is met in the normal game state, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, the player is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous situation, and is not at a particularly large disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means E2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means is capable of variably displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the winning determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination condition is that the variable display of the identification pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after transitioning to the normal gaming state (see Figure 57).

With this type of gaming machine, if the specific measurement number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or exceeds the reference number and the display of the identification symbols has been changed a specified number of times since the machine transitioned to the normal gaming state, the game becomes unplayable. In this way, even after the machine transitioned to the normal gaming state, the player can continue playing for a while until the display of the identification symbols has been changed a specified number of times.

The invention according to means E3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E2,
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling the performance is provided.
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number, a special effect (a special effect after transition to the normal game state shown in FIG. 58(B)(C)) can be executed from the transition to the normal game state until the variable display of the identification symbol is executed the specified number of times (30 times),
This gaming machine is characterized in that even when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the special effects can be executed from the time of transition to the normal game state until the variable display of the identification pattern is executed the specified number of times (30 times).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is less than the reference number, it is possible to enjoy special effects from the time the game transitions to normal play mode until the display of the variable identification symbols is executed a specified number of times. On the other hand, even when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to enjoy special effects from the time the game transitions to normal play mode until the display of the variable identification symbols is executed a specified number of times. In this way, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the game transitions to normal play mode, the special effects that were executed before play became impossible can be executed as they were, making it possible to synchronize the timing at which play becomes impossible and the timing at which the special effects end.

The invention according to means E4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) when determining a winning through the winning determination process,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the termination condition is that a predetermined number (for example, four) of the hit determination processes that were reserved when the game transitioned to the normal game state are consumed in the normal game state (see Figure 53).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the predetermined number of win determination processes that were reserved when the machine transitioned to the normal game mode are consumed in the normal game mode, the game becomes unplayable. In this way, even after transitioning to the normal game mode, the player can continue playing for a while until the predetermined number of reserved win determination processes are consumed.

The invention according to means E5 is:
In the gaming machine according to means E4,
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling the performance is provided.
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number, an advantageous effect (a remaining reserved special effect shown in FIG. 54) can be executed until the predetermined number of the winning determination processes reserved at the time of transition to the normal gaming state are consumed in the normal gaming state.
This gaming machine is characterized in that even when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the advantageous effect (the remaining reserved special effect shown in Figure 54) can be executed until the hit determination process that was reserved for a predetermined number when the game state was changed to the normal game state is consumed in the normal game state.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is less than the reference number, it is possible for the player to enjoy advantageous effects until the predetermined number of hit determination processes that were reserved when the game transitioned to the normal game state are consumed in the normal game state. On the other hand, even when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible for the player to enjoy advantageous effects until the predetermined number of hit determination processes that were reserved when the game transitioned to the normal game state are consumed in the normal game state. In this way, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the game transitions to the normal game state, the advantageous effects that were present before the game became unplayable are still executed, making it possible to synchronize the timing at which the game becomes unplayable with the timing at which the advantageous effects end.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means E1 to E5 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and a predetermined termination condition is met in the normal game state, the game is disabled. This makes it possible to solve (achieve) the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieve the effect of doing so).

<Means F>
The invention according to means F1 is:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process may be stopped).
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to execute a game impossibility warning effect (display of a game stop warning image shown in Figure 28 (B)) that warns that the game will become impossible to play.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, when the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number, a game-impossible warning effect is executed to warn players that play will become impossible. This allows players to know in advance that play will become impossible, preventing them from being confused by a sudden inability to play.

The invention according to means F2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means F1,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a pre-reference number (70,000) that is less than the reference number, it is possible to execute a pre-play unavailability warning effect (display of an over-prize ball warning image KY shown in Figure 28 (A)) that warns that the specific measurement number is approaching the reference number.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number, a pre-play unplayable notification effect is executed, warning that the specific measurement number is approaching the reference number. Then, when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds the reference number, a pre-play unplayable notification effect is executed, warning that play will become unplayable. In this way, players can gradually grasp in advance the circumstances under which play will become unplayable, making it easier for them to understand the situation.

The invention according to means F3 is:
In the gaming machine according to the means F1 or F2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means controls the game to be unplayable when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and an advantageous gaming state (high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see Figure 25).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or exceeds the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes unplayable. Therefore, the player is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and is not at a particularly large disadvantage. In this way, the player can stop playing at a time that is convenient for them.

The invention according to means F4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means F3,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the unplayable notification display is a display that notifies the player that the game will become unplayable when the advantageous game state ends (a display indicating that "game ends when the high base state ends," see Figure 28 (B)).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, the game unplayable warning effect notifies the player that the game will become unplayable once the advantageous game state ends. This allows the player to accurately understand when the game will become unplayable.

The invention according to means F5 is:
In the gaming machine according to the means F1 or F2,
The game control means is capable of variably displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the winning determination process,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the game inability notification display is a display that indicates the number of times the identification pattern will change until the game becomes impossible to play (display of the remaining number of times game can be stopped image LN1 shown in Figure 56 (B)).

With this type of gaming machine, when the specific measurement number based on the number of winning balls reaches or exceeds a reference number, a warning that the game will no longer be playable is displayed, letting the player know how many times the identification symbol will change until the game will no longer be playable. Therefore, each time the identification symbol is changed, the player can understand that they are gradually approaching a situation where they will no longer be able to play.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention relating to means F1 to F4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and may control the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a game disabled warning presentation that warns that the game will be disabled when the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number. This makes it possible to solve (achieve) the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

<Means G>
The invention according to means G1 is:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling the performance;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a launch operation means (handle 72k) that can launch game balls based on an operation,
When a predetermined stop condition is met (for example, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more), the game control means controls the game so that it cannot be executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of executing a warning presentation (an operation warning presentation shown in Figure 51 (B) or Figure 52 (B), or a contact warning presentation shown in Figure 61 (B) or Figure 62 (B)) to call attention to a contact with the launch operation means when the game is controlled so that it cannot be executed.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when a predetermined stop condition is met, the game becomes unplayable. At this time, the player may operate the firing operation means without fully understanding that the game is unplayable. In this case, a warning display is executed to alert the player. In this way, it is possible to ensure that the player who comes into contact with the firing operation means is aware that the game is unplayable.

The invention according to means G2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means G1,
The launch operation means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can launch game balls even when the game is controlled so that it cannot be played (the launch control process (S109) is not stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, if the player operates the play operation means, the game ball will be fired. This could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the game can still be played. Therefore, by executing a warning display, it is possible to reliably make the player aware that the game cannot be played.

The invention according to means G3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number (a difference in the number of balls) based on the number of prize balls awarded to a player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the stopping condition includes the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, even if a player operates the firing operation means when play is impossible, a warning display ensures that the player is aware that play is impossible.

The invention according to means G4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means is capable of determining whether a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism) exists (capable of executing error processing (S111)),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the stop condition includes a determination by the gaming control means that the specific abnormality exists.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the game control means determines that a specific abnormality has occurred, the game becomes unplayable. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing when a specific abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, even if the player operates the firing operation means when the game is unplayable, the warning display ensures that the player is aware that the game cannot be played.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-070611 A, when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (gaming control means) disables the game. Therefore, once the game is disabled, the player is unable to continue playing. However, once the game is disabled, there is a risk that the player may operate the firing operation means without fully understanding that the game is disabled. Therefore, the invention of means G1 to G4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-070611 A in that the presentation control means is capable of executing a warning presentation to alert the player based on contact with the firing operation means when the game is disabled. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that can reliably inform a player who contacts the firing operation means that the game is disabled. (This provides an advantageous effect.)

<Means H>
The invention according to means H1 is:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be executed (it is possible to stop the game control process and the launch control process),
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number (78,500) that is smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect (reference number reaching notice effect (next jackpot reaching notice effect and running up effect)) is not executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute the advance notice performance (reference number reaching notice performance (next jackpot reaching notice performance and run-up performance)) based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a player is suddenly unable to play when the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number, this could cause great discomfort. Therefore, when the specific measurement number is less than a specific number that is smaller than the reference number, the advance warning effect is not executed, but is executed when the specific measurement number exceeds the specific number. This allows the player to be aware of the situation in which play will become impossible before the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number, preventing great discomfort when play becomes impossible.

The invention according to means H2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means H1,
The performance control means
The advance notice performance (standard number reaching notice performance (next big win reaching notice performance and running up performance)) is executed asynchronously with the performance currently being executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the advance notice performance continues at least until the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number (see Figure 65).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number, a pre-warning effect is executed asynchronously with the currently running effect. This pre-warning effect continues until the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a reference number. In this way, the pre-warning effect, which is executed asynchronously from the time the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number until it reaches the reference number, makes it appear to the player that the game is naturally becoming impossible to play.

The invention according to means H3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means H1 or H2,
The performance control means
The effect pattern (EZ) indicating whether it is a win or not can be displayed in a stopped state after being displayed in a variable manner.
This gaming machine is characterized in that, while the advance notice performance is being executed, a reduced performance pattern (mini performance pattern ez) in which the performance pattern is reduced is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped (see Figures 67 (B) (D)).

With this type of gaming machine, while the advance notice is being played, the reduced effect symbol, which is a smaller version of the original effect symbol, changes and then stops. In this way, the reduced effect symbol that replaces the original effect symbol indicates whether or not a win has occurred, while preventing the advance notice from becoming difficult to understand.

The invention according to means H4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H3,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the winning game will be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it suggests that the winning game will be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a reduced winning suggestion effect (display of a mini SP reach background image g113 showing that the main character is happy to have won the battle, see Figure 67 (D)) in which the winning suggestion effect is scaled down.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a winning game is suggested to be played during the execution of the advance notice effect, a reduced win suggestion effect is executed, which is a reduced version of the win suggestion effect. In this way, the reduced win suggestion effect that replaces the win suggestion effect suggests that a winning game will be played, while preventing the advance notice effect from becoming difficult to understand.

The invention according to means H5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H2 to H4,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player,
In one winning game, a specified number (1500) of prize balls can be awarded.
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number is the number (78,500) obtained by subtracting the specified number (1,500) from the reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number falls below the specified number of prize balls awarded in one winning game before reaching the reference number, a pre-warning effect is executed. In this way, by executing the pre-warning effect only in situations where it is likely that the game will be impossible to play in the next winning game, it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to frequent pre-warning effects being executed.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means H1 to H5 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a pre-warning presentation that warns the player that the game will be disabled when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number that is smaller than the reference number. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means I>
The invention according to means I1 is
a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can execute a winning game (jackpot game) when a winning (jackpot) is determined in the winning determination process (jackpot determination process);
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (78,500, 79,550) that is smaller than the reference number, a pre-notification effect (a next big win arrival suggestion effect shown in FIG. 72(C) and an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect shown in FIG. 74(B)) that notifies the player that the game will become impossible to play can be executed.
In one winning game, a prescribed number of prize balls (1500, 450) can be awarded.
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (78,500, 79,550) is the number obtained by subtracting the specified number (1,500, 450) from the reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes unplayable when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, it is possible to implement a pre-warning effect to warn that play will become unplayable before the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, but if pre-warning effects are implemented too frequently, this could cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, if the specific measurement number falls below a specified number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game, before reaching the reference number, a pre-warning effect is implemented. In this way, by implementing a pre-warning effect when it is likely that play will become unplayable in the next winning game, it is possible to prevent discomfort caused by frequent pre-warning effects.

The invention according to means I2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I1,
The types of winnings include a first winning (jackpot symbol Z2) and a second winning (jackpot symbol Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the first winning, a first specified number (450) of prize balls are set to be awarded (see FIG. 70 ),
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500) of prize balls, which is greater than the first specified number, is set to be awarded (see FIG. 70 ),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (78,500) is the number obtained by subtracting the second specified number (1,500) from the reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, a pre-announcement effect is executed based on the fact that the specific measurement number falls below the number of prize balls (second specified number) awarded in one winning game when a second win is determined before reaching the reference number. In this way, even if there are multiple types of wins, it is possible to execute a pre-announcement effect assuming that the player will win the second win, which is more advantageous to the player, on the next win.

The invention according to means I3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I2,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the specific measurement number becoming equal to or greater than the specific number (78,500) during the execution of the winning game, the advance notice effect (the effect suggesting the next jackpot being reached, as shown in Figure 72 (C)) can be started during the ending of the winning game (see Figure 71).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number during a winning game, a pre-warning effect will begin during the ending of that winning game. This makes it possible for the player to understand, just before the winning game ends, that a situation has arisen in which the next winning game may become unplayable. In other words, even if the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number during a winning game, the pre-warning effect will not begin until the ending begins. This allows the player to enjoy the winning game without being overly aware that the game will become unplayable.

The invention according to means I4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I1,
The types of winnings include a first winning (jackpot symbol Z2) and a second winning (jackpot symbol Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the first winning, a first specified number (450) of prize balls are set to be awarded (see FIG. 70 ),
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500) of prize balls, which is greater than the first specified number, is set to be awarded (see FIG. 70 ),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (79,550) is the number obtained by subtracting the first specified number (450) from the reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number falls below the first specified number, which is the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game when a first win is determined, before it reaches the reference number, a pre-announcement effect is executed. In this way, assuming that the player wins a first win that is disadvantageous to the player on the next win, it is possible to execute a pre-announcement effect if there is a high possibility that the game will become impossible to play at least until the next winning game.

The invention according to means I5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means I2 to I4,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute the advance warning effect (excess ball abnormal warning effect shown in Figure 74 (B)) when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number (see Figure 73).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, a pre-warning effect is executed when the specific measurement number falls below the specified number of prize balls awarded in one winning game before reaching the reference number. In this way, by executing a pre-warning effect when it appears that the next winning game will be impossible to play, it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to frequent pre-warning effects.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the inventions of means I1 to I5 differ from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number, the presentation control means is capable of executing a pre-warning presentation that warns the player that the game will be disabled when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a specific number that is smaller than the reference number, and a specified number of prize balls is set to be awarded in one winning game, the specified number being the base number minus the specified number. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means J>
The invention according to means J1 is as follows:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling the performance;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with operable operating means (normal button 40, select button),
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
Before the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a pre-notification effect (an abnormal over-prize ball notification effect, a residual ball number notification effect) can be executed to notify that the game will become impossible to execute,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the performance items related to the advance notice performance (performance items related to the abnormal over-prize ball notice performance, performance items related to the remaining ball number notification performance) can be set based on operations on the operating means (see Figures 75 (C) (D)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, before the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number, a pre-warning effect is executed to warn that play will become impossible. This allows the player to be aware of the situation in which play will become impossible in advance, preventing great discomfort when play becomes impossible. Furthermore, by setting the performance items related to the pre-warning effect based on operations on the operating means, it is possible to optimally adjust the performance items related to the pre-warning effect.

The invention according to means J2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means J1,
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (75,000) that is smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect (the excessive prize ball abnormal notice effect shown in FIG. 76(B)) can be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (75,000) can be set as a performance item related to the advance notice performance based on operation of the operating means (see Figure 75 (C)).

If the advance warning effect is executed even though the specific measurement number is significantly smaller than the reference number, it will cause excessive anxiety in the player. On the other hand, if the advance warning effect is executed just before the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, the player will feel anxious that they will soon be unable to play. Therefore, by setting the specific number that triggers the execution of the advance warning effect based on operation of the operating means, it is possible to appropriately adjust the execution timing of the advance warning effect.

The invention according to means J3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means J2,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number can be set based on operation of the operating means during initial setup after the power is turned on (while the excessive prize ball abnormality notification display setting image SX shown in Figure 75 (C) or the residual ball number notification display setting image SY shown in Figure 75 (D) is displayed).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, during initial setup after the power is turned on, an employee at the gaming center sets the specific number that triggers the execution of the advance notice effect based on the operation of the operating means. This allows the employee at the gaming center to optimally adjust the execution timing of the advance notice effect as needed depending on the situation.

The invention according to means J4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means J1 to J3,
The presentation control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to set, based on operation of the operating means, whether or not to execute the pre-notification presentation as a presentation item related to the pre-notification presentation (whether or not to execute an excessive prize ball abnormality presentation, whether or not to execute a residual ball number notification presentation) (see Figures 75 (C) and 75 (D)).

With this type of gaming machine, if a player desires that the advance warning effect not be executed, the advance warning effect is set to not be executed based on operation of the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent players who do not want the advance warning effect to be executed from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the advance warning effect.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention relating to means J1 to J4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number, the presentation control means is capable of executing a pre-warning presentation that warns that the game will be disabled before the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds the reference number, and the presentation items related to the pre-warning presentation can be set based on operation of the operating means. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means K>
The invention according to means K1 is as follows:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
An operable operating means (ball lending button 62);
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a ball lending control unit (payout control microcomputer 171) that can lend game balls based on an operation to the operating means,
The game control means
Based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition (the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, or unauthorized magnetism is detected), it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be executed (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, even if the operating means is operated, the ball lending control unit is made unable to lend balls (the ball lending control stop processing shown in step S115 is executed).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a game is disabled, the player cannot continue playing. If a player were to operate the control means and loan out game balls at this time, the player would incur a loss because they would not be able to play on the gaming machine. Therefore, by preventing the loan of game balls even if the control means is operated after a game is disabled, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player incurs a loss.

The invention according to means K2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means K1,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it can control the game so that it cannot be executed (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped) based on the fulfillment of the specified stop condition, which is when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, even if the player operates the operating means after play becomes impossible due to the specific measurement number exceeding the reference number, ball lending will not be performed. This makes it possible to prevent situations in which ball lending is performed and the player suffers a loss.

The invention according to means K3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means K1 or K2,
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetic field),
This gaming machine is characterized by the fact that it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be executed (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped) based on the determination that the specific abnormality exists as the fulfillment of the specified stop condition.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs, the game becomes unplayable. Even if the player subsequently operates the operating means, ball lending will not be performed. This prevents situations in which ball lending is performed and the player suffers a loss.

The invention according to means K4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to K3,
A notification means (balance display unit 61) is provided to indicate that ball lending is possible,
The notification means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the game is controlled to be unplayable based on the fulfillment of the specified stop condition, it is possible to indicate that ball lending is unplayable (it is possible to display ``E'' indicating that ball lending is unplayable) (see Figure 78 (B)).

A gaming machine with this configuration is provided with a notification means that indicates that ball lending is possible. When game play is controlled so that it cannot be played, the notification means indicates that ball lending is not possible. This makes it easier for players to understand when ball lending is not possible.

The invention according to means K5 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to K4,
A performance control means is provided for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the game is controlled to be unplayable based on the fulfillment of the specified stop condition, it is capable of executing a ball lending impossible notification display (ball lending impossible notification display shown in Figures 79 (A) and (B)) indicating that ball lending is impossible.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when a game is controlled so that it cannot be played, a ball lending unavailable notification is executed, indicating that ball lending is unavailable. This makes it easier for players to understand that ball lending cannot be performed.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-070611 A, when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (gaming control means) controls the game to be disabled. Therefore, after the game is disabled, the player cannot continue playing. Even after the game is disabled, there is a risk that the player may operate the operating means (ball lending button) to lend gaming balls. However, if the game is disabled but gaming balls are lent, the player may suffer a loss. Therefore, the inventions relating to means K1 to K5 differ from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-070611 A in that, when the gaming control means controls the game to be disabled, the ball lending control unit is disabled from lending balls even if the operating means is operated. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that can prevent players from losing money (achieves the beneficial effect).

<Means L>
The invention according to means L1 is as follows:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized by being able to execute a specific measurement number effect (current difference ball number suggestion effect shown in Figure 82 (C)) that shows a number related to the specific measurement number.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, by executing a specific measurement number effect that displays a number related to the specific measurement number, it is possible to let the player know how close they are to being unable to play.

The invention according to means L2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means L1,
The performance control means
During the execution of the specific measurement number effect, the specific measurement number changes (increases), and it is possible to change (increase) the number related to the specific measurement number (see Figures 82(C) and (D)).
This gaming machine is characterized in that even if the specific measurement number changes (decreases) while the specific measurement number presentation is being executed, the numbers related to the specific measurement number can be displayed without changing (decreasing) (see Figures 83 (D) and 84 (A)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, as the specific measurement number changes while the specific measurement number effect is being executed, the number associated with the specific measurement number changes and is displayed accordingly. On the other hand, even if the specific measurement number changes while the specific measurement number effect is being executed, the number associated with the specific measurement number may remain unchanged. This makes it possible to prevent players from paying attention to the number associated with the specific measurement number when the specific measurement number changes frequently.

The invention according to means L3 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means L2,
The performance control means
During the execution of the specific measurement number effect, the specific measurement number increases, and the number related to the specific measurement number can be increased and displayed (see Figures 82(C) and (D)).
This gaming machine is characterized in that even if the specific measurement number decreases while the specific measurement number presentation is being executed, the numbers related to the specific measurement number can be displayed without decreasing (see Figures 83 (D) and 84 (A)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the specific measurement number increases while the specific measurement number effect is being played, the number related to the specific measurement number will increase, while if the specific measurement number decreases, the number related to the specific measurement number will remain unchanged. This makes it possible for the player to focus on the number related to the specific measurement number only when the specific measurement number increases.

The invention according to means L4 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means L3,
The game control means can control the game to an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, jackpot game state and high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means can execute the specific measurement number presentation only when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number related to the specific measurement number only when the machine is controlled to a favorable gaming state and the specific measurement number is increasing. In other words, when the machine is controlled to a normal gaming state or when the specific measurement number is decreasing, it is possible to deliberately not make the player pay attention to the number related to the specific measurement number.

The invention according to means L5 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in any one of means L2 to L4,
The game control means
When a win (jackpot) is determined by the win determination process, a win game (jackpot game) can be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the winning game begins, the number related to the specific measurement number can be corrected and displayed based on the specific measurement number measured by the game control means (see Figure 84 (B)).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, even if the specific measurement number changes while the specific measurement number effect is being played, the number associated with the specific measurement number may remain unchanged. However, once a winning game begins, the number associated with the correct specific measurement number is displayed. In this way, once a winning game begins, the player can grasp the correct number associated with the specific measurement number.

The invention according to means L6 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in any one of means L2 to L5,
The game control means
When a win (jackpot) is determined by the win determination process, a win game (jackpot game) can be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the winning game ends, the number related to the specific measurement number can be corrected and displayed based on the specific measurement number measured by the game control means (see Figure 83 (B)).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, even if the specific measurement number changes while the specific measurement number effect is being played, the number associated with the specific measurement number may remain unchanged. However, once the winning game ends, the number associated with the correct specific measurement number is displayed. In this way, once the winning game ends, the player can grasp the correct number associated with the specific measurement number.

The invention according to means L7 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in any one of means L1 to means L6,
The performance control means
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than half of the reference number (40,000), the specific measurement number effect can be started.
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number is less than half (40,000) of the reference number, the specific measurement number presentation is not started.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific measurement number is less than half the reference number, the specific measurement number effect showing the specific measurement number does not begin. In this way, when the specific measurement number is not close enough to the reference number, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the numbers related to the specific measurement number.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention relating to means L1 to L7 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific measurement number presentation that shows a number related to the specific measurement number. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means M>
The invention according to means M1 is as follows:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling the performance;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with operable predetermined operation means (normal button 40 and select button),
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, a special operation presentation (display of the input reflection image NP shown in Figure 87 (D)) can be executed based on an operation to the specified operating means.

With this gaming machine configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, if the player operates a specified operation means after play has been disabled, a special operation presentation is executed. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game even after play has become impossible.

The invention according to means M2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means M1,
The performance control means
After the game is controlled to be unplayable, characters can be accepted based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (see FIG. 87(C)).
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to display the accepted text ("Clear by Taro") as the special operation effect (see Figure 87 (D)).

With this gaming machine, after the game is disabled, the player inputs any character by operating the specified operating means. This causes the character input by the player to be displayed as a special operation effect. In this way, the player can be given any character to commemorate the specific measurement number reaching or exceeding the reference number, giving them a special sense of accomplishment.

The invention according to means M3 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means M2,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the game is controlled so that it cannot be played, it is possible to display the accepted text ("Clear by Taro") in addition to an achievement image (achievement image OF shown in Figure 87(B)) indicating that the specific measurement number has reached or exceeded the reference number (see Figure 87(C)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, after the game is disabled, the characters entered by the player are displayed along with an achievement image indicating that the specific measurement number has reached or exceeded the reference number. This allows the player to see the achievement image and the characters they entered, giving them a great sense of satisfaction.

The invention according to means M4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means M2 or M3,
A specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191) that can be operated is provided,
The game control means
When the power is turned on, the game information relating to the game is erased based on the fact that the specific operation means is operated, but the character information of the accepted characters (character information of "Clear by Taro") is not erased.
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the power is turned on after the game has been controlled so that it cannot be played, the accepted characters can be displayed based on the character information (see Figure 88 (B)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the power is cut off after the game is disabled. Then, based on the fact that the specific operation means was operated when the power was turned on, game information related to the game is erased. However, at this time, the character information of the characters that have been accepted is not erased. This makes it possible to display, as a commemoration, the characters entered by a player who has reached or exceeded the reference number of specific measurements, even after the power is turned on after the game has been disabled.

However, with the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention relating to means M1 to M4 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of controlling the game to be disabled when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a special operation presentation based on an operation on a predetermined operation means after the game has been disabled. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of doing so).

<Means N>
The invention according to means N1 is as follows:
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
When the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), an excess prize ball prevention function that controls the game so that it cannot be played can be activated (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, it is possible to execute special effects (effects after abnormal over-prize ball activation (special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B)), special cut-in preview effect (see Figure 90 (B-2)), special opening effect (see Figures 91 (B-2) (C-2)), special customer waiting demo effect (see Figure 92 (B-2)))) that would not be executed before the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, an over-prize ball prevention function is activated, which disables play when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the power is turned on, a special effect may be executed that would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Therefore, players who become aware of the special effect can recognize that this is a gaming machine that has previously awarded excessive prize balls, giving them a sense of exhilaration.

The invention according to means N2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means N1,
A specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191) that can be operated is provided,
The game control means
When the power is turned on, the game information relating to the game is erased based on the fact that the specific operation means is operated, but the operation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is not erased.
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that even if the game information is erased, the special effects (effects after abnormal operation of excess prize balls (special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B)), special cut-in notice effect (see Figure 90 (B-2)), special opening effect (see Figures 91 (B-2) (C-2)), special customer waiting demo effect (see Figure 92 (B-2)))) can be executed based on the operation information.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if the specific operating means is operated when the power is turned on and game information related to the game is erased, the activation information indicating that the excess prize ball prevention function has been activated is not erased. Therefore, even if game information is erased after the excess prize ball prevention function is activated, it is possible for the player to be aware of special effects that would not have been executed before the excess prize ball prevention function was activated.

The invention according to means N3 is:
In the gaming machine according to the means N1 or N2,
The effect control means is capable of executing a reach effect after the effect symbols (EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) become reach,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the reach effects include, as the special effects, a special reach effect (special SP reach (see Figure 89 (B))) that will not be executed before the excess prize ball prevention function is activated.

With a gaming machine configured this way, after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated and the power is turned on, a special reach effect may be executed, which would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Therefore, players who understand the special reach effect can enjoy a novel reach effect, and can also recognize that this is a gaming machine in which excessive prize balls have been awarded in the past.

The invention according to means N4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to N3,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notice effect that suggests a possibility that the winning game will be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the preview performance includes, as the special performance, a special preview performance (special cut-in preview performance (see Figure 90 (B-2))) that will not be executed before the excess prize ball prevention function is activated.

With a gaming machine configured in this way, after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated and the power is turned on, a special preview effect may be executed that would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Therefore, players who are aware of the special preview effect can enjoy a novel preview effect and recognize that this is a gaming machine in which excessive prize balls have been awarded in the past.

The invention according to means N5 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to N4,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player,
The effect control means is capable of executing a winning effect (a big winning effect (an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect)) during the execution of the winning game,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the winning effects include, as the special effects, a special winning effect (special opening effect (see Figures 91 (B-2) (C-2))) that will not be executed before the excess prize ball prevention function is activated.

With a gaming machine configured this way, when the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, a special winning effect may be executed that would not have been executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Therefore, players who are aware of the special winning effect can enjoy a novel winning effect and recognize that this is a gaming machine that has previously awarded excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means N6 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to N5,
The performance control means is capable of executing a customer waiting performance indicating that a variable performance is not being executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the customer waiting effects include, as the special effects, a special customer waiting effect (special customer waiting demo effect (see Figure 92 (B-2))) that will not be executed before the excess prize ball prevention function is activated.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the power is turned on after the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated, a special customer waiting effect may be executed, which would not have been executed before the excessive prize ball prevention function was activated. Therefore, players who become aware of the special customer waiting effect can be made aware that this is a gaming machine in which excessive prize balls have been awarded in the past, increasing their motivation to play.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, it is possible for a player to win excessive prize balls through continued play. In such cases, the gaming machine does not prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. Therefore, the invention of means N1 to N6 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-209170 A in that the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player, and is capable of activating an over-prize ball prevention function that disables game play when the specific measurement number exceeds a predetermined reference number. The invention also erases game information based on the operation of the specific operation means, but does not erase the activation information indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated. Therefore, after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, a special effect that would not be executed before the over-prize ball prevention function was activated can be executed. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players (achieves the effect of achieving this).

<Means O>
The invention according to means O1 is:
a game control means (a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with predetermined notification means (image display device 50 (display screen 50a), speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board lamp 54),
The game control means can control the game so that it cannot be executed (can stop the game control process and the launch control process) when a predetermined stop condition (the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, or an illegal magnetism is detected) is met,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when control that has made it impossible to play a game continues after the power is turned on, the notification means goes into a special abnormal state (an over-prize ball abnormality maintenance image KRX displayed on the display screen 50a, a voice output from the speaker 52 saying "The over-prize ball abnormality has not been released. Please clear the RAM," and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 flash red) indicating that control that has made it impossible to play a game continues (see Figures 93 (A) and 93 (B)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when a predetermined stop condition is met, the machine disables play. Thereafter, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the disablement control may still be in effect. In this case, the notification means goes into a special abnormal state, indicating that the disablement control is still in effect. This ensures that arcade staff are aware that the disablement control is still in effect after the power is turned on.

The invention according to means O2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to means O1,
A specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191) that can be operated is provided,
The game control means
It is possible to release the control that has made it impossible to execute a game based on the fact that the specific operation means has been operated when the power is turned on (the control that makes it impossible to execute a game can be released when RAM clearing is executed),
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to continue the control that has made it impossible to play a game based on the fact that the specific operating means has not been operated when the power is turned on (the control that has made it impossible to play a game cannot be released unless RAM clearing is performed).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, after control has been exercised to disable gameplay, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the amusement parlor employee may not have operated the specific operating means. In this case, even though the control that disabled gameplay continues, the amusement parlor employee may mistakenly believe that the gaming machine is still capable of gameplay. However, even in such a case, the notification means will enter a special abnormal mode, making it possible for the amusement parlor employee to be reliably informed that the control that disabled gameplay continues.

The invention according to means O3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means O1 or O2,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the special abnormal mode is a mode that is only displayed when control that has made it impossible to play a game continues after the power is turned on (see Figures 93 (A) and 93 (B)).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, the special abnormality indicated by the notification means is a state that is only indicated if control that disabled play continues after the power was turned on. This makes it easier for gaming parlor employees who are aware of the special abnormality to recognize that an abnormality has occurred after the power was turned on.

The invention according to means O4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to O3,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the special abnormal mode occurs after power is turned on, the notification means continues the special abnormal mode until the power is cut off (see Figures 93 (A) and 93 (B)).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the notification means enters a special abnormal state after power is turned on, the special abnormal state will continue until the power is turned off. This makes it easier for gaming parlor employees to notice that the notification means has entered a special abnormal state after power is turned on.

The invention according to means O5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to O4,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified stop condition is met, the specific measurement number becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. After play becomes impossible, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the control that made play impossible may still be in effect. In this case, the notification means goes into a special abnormal mode, allowing arcade employees to be sure that the control that made play impossible is still in effect.

The invention according to means O6 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to O5,
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetic field),
This gaming machine is characterized by the fact that it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be played (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped) based on the determination that the specific abnormality exists as the fulfillment of the specified stop condition.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs, the game becomes unplayable. After the game becomes unplayable, the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the control that made the game unplayable may still be in effect. In this case, the notification means goes into a special abnormality mode, allowing arcade employees to be sure that the control that made the game unplayable is still in effect.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A, when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (gaming control means) disables gameplay. Therefore, once a game is disabled, players are unable to continue playing. After a game is disabled, an amusement center employee shuts off the power and then turns it back on. In this case, an amusement center employee who turns on the power before business hours may mistakenly believe that the game disablement has been lifted, even though the game disablement continues. Alternatively, an amusement center employee who turns on the power before business hours may not fully understand that the gaming machine was disabled the previous day. In these cases, if business hours begin with the game disablement still in place, players may be unable to play. Therefore, the invention relating to means O1 to O6 differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A in that the notification means enters a special abnormal state indicating that control that has disabled game execution is continuing if control that has disabled game execution continues after the power is turned on. This solves the problem (achieves the effect) of providing a gaming machine that allows the player to reliably know that control that has disabled game execution is still continuing after the power is turned on.

<Means P>
The invention according to means P1 is as follows:
Entry areas (first large entry opening 14, second large entry opening 15, second starting opening 12, specific area 16),
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means
If the winning determination process determines that a winning has occurred, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed.
When a predetermined stopping condition (the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, or an illegal magnetism is detected) is met, the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chute opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) can be moved so that the ease with which the gaming ball enters the ball entry section changes between the time the power is turned on and the time the hit determination process is started (see Figure 95).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, there is a risk that ball jamming may occur due to the game movable member when the game is disabled. Therefore, after the game is disabled, the game movable member moves so that the ease with which the game ball can enter the ball entry section changes between the time the power is turned on and the start of the hit determination process. This makes it possible to automatically resolve ball jamming even if it occurs due to the game movable member.

The invention according to means P2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means P1,
The device is provided with detection means (a first large winning hole sensor, a second large winning hole sensor 15a, a second starting hole sensor, and a specific area sensor 16a) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that if the game movable member is moved between the time the power is turned on and the time the hit determination process is started, even if the game ball enters the ball entry section, the detection of the detection means can be disabled (the sensor detection disable process of step S035 can be executed).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, it is possible to resolve ball jamming by moving the movable gaming member after powering on. However, there is a risk that the gaming ball may enter the ball entry area when the ball jamming is resolved. Therefore, by disabling detection by the detection means even if the gaming ball enters the ball entry area, it is possible to prevent unintended bonuses from being awarded after powering on.

The invention according to means P3 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to means P1 or P2,
The game control means
If the game is not controlled to be unplayable before the power is turned on, the game movable member is not moved (not set to ball-biting prevention mode) from the time the power is turned on until the hit determination process is started,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if the control that made it impossible to play the game after the power was turned on is released, the game movable member can be moved (can be set to ball-biting prevention mode) between the time the power was turned on and the time the hit determination process began.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the control that disabled play after the power was turned on is released, the game movable member will move between the time the power was turned on and the start of the hit detection process. On the other hand, if the control that disabled play before the power was turned on is not in place, the game movable member will not move. This makes it possible to prevent the game movable member from moving every time the power is turned on.

The invention according to means P4 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means P1 to P3,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified stop condition is met, the specific measurement number becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, when play becomes impossible, the game movable member stops moving, which can lead to ball jamming. Therefore, by turning on the power, the game movable member can move, eliminating ball jamming.

The invention according to means P5 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means P1 to P4,
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetic field),
This gaming machine is characterized by the fact that it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be played (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped) based on the determination that the specific abnormality exists as the fulfillment of the specified stop condition.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs, the game becomes unplayable. When this happens, the game movable part stops moving, which could result in ball jamming. Therefore, by turning the power on, the game movable part can move, which can resolve the ball jamming.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A, when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (gaming control means) disables the game. Therefore, once the game is disabled, the player cannot continue playing. When the gaming control means disables the game, it stops the movement of the game movable member toward the ball entry section. However, stopping the game movable member at an unexpected timing for the gaming control means may result in ball jamming. Therefore, the inventions relating to means P1 to P5 differ from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A in that the gaming control means can move the game movable member so as to change the ease with which a game ball can enter the ball entry section between the time the game is disabled and the time the power is cut off. This makes it possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that can eliminate ball jamming (achieve the effect of doing so).

<Means Q>
The invention according to means Q1 is:
Entry areas (first large entry opening 14, second large entry opening 15, second starting opening 12, specific area 16),
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means
When a predetermined stopping condition (the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, or an illegal magnetism is detected) is met, the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the game movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chute opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) can be moved so that the ease with which the game ball enters the ball entry section changes from the time the game is controlled to be impossible to play until the power is cut off (see Figure 99).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, there is a risk that ball jamming may occur due to the game movable member when the game is disabled. Therefore, the game movable member moves so that the ease with which game balls can enter the ball entry section changes between the time the game is disabled and the time the power is cut off. This makes it possible to automatically resolve ball jamming even if it occurs due to the game movable member.

The invention relating to means Q2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Q1,
The device is provided with detection means (a first large winning hole sensor, a second large winning hole sensor 15a, a second starting hole sensor, and a specific area sensor 16a) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that if the game movable member is moved between the time the game is controlled to be impossible to play and the time the power is cut off, even if the game ball enters the ball entry section, the detection of the detection means can be disabled (the sensor detection disable process of step S047 can be executed).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, it is possible to resolve ball jamming by moving the movable gaming member after the game is disabled. However, there is a risk that the game ball may enter the ball entry area when the ball jamming is resolved. Therefore, by disabling detection by the detection means even if the game ball enters the ball entry area, it is possible to prevent unintended prize balls from being awarded after the game is disabled.

The invention relating to means Q3 is:
In the gaming machine according to the means Q1 or Q2,
The game control means
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (number of balls difference) based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified stop condition is met, the specific measurement number becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, play becomes impossible when a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds a reference number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, when play becomes impossible, the game movable member stops moving, which can lead to ball jamming. Therefore, by moving the game movable member between the time play is disabled and the time the power is cut off, it is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned ball jamming.

The invention according to means Q4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means Q1 to Q3,
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetic field),
This gaming machine is characterized by the fact that it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be played (the game control process and launch control process can be stopped) based on the determination that the specific abnormality exists as the fulfillment of the specified stop condition.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs, the game becomes unplayable. At this time, the game movable part will no longer move, which could result in ball jamming. Therefore, by moving the game movable part between the time the game is disabled and the time the power is cut off, it is possible to resolve the ball jamming problem.

In the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A, when unauthorized magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (gaming control means) disables the game. Therefore, once the game is disabled, the player cannot continue playing. When the gaming control means disables the game, it stops the movement of the gaming movable member toward the ball entry section. However, stopping the gaming movable member at an unexpected timing for the gaming control means may result in ball jamming. Therefore, the inventions relating to means Q1 to Q4 differ from the gaming machine described in JP 2017-70611 A in that the gaming control means can move the gaming movable member so as to change the ease with which a gaming ball can enter the ball entry section between the time the power is turned on and the start of the hit determination process. This solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that can eliminate ball jamming (achieve the effect of achieving this).

40...Normal button 50...Image display device 50a...Display screen 53...Frame lamp 54...Board lamp 61...Balance display unit 62...Ball loan button 72k...Handle 101...Game control microcomputer 121...Performance control microcomputer 171...Payout control microcomputer 191...RAM clear switch PY1...Pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

a game control means capable of determining whether a ball has been hit based on the ball entering the ball entrance;
A specific operating means that can be operated;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of controlling performance,
The game control means
Based on the determination in the hit determination, the game can be controlled to a jackpot game state,
When the specific operation means is operated upon power-on, information relating to a game can be erased;
When the difference between the number of prize balls awarded to a player and the number of shot balls is defined as the difference in the number of balls, it is possible to measure a specific measurement number which is the difference between the minimum difference in the number of balls, which is the minimum value of the difference in the number of balls, and the maximum value of the difference in the number of balls after the minimum difference in the number of balls is measured,
When the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number while the game is in the jackpot gaming state, the game is controlled to disable the hit determination at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends;
If the information relating to the game is not erased when the power is turned on after the hit determination is disabled, the hit determination is maintained as being disabled,
After the hit determination is disabled, when the information relating to the game is to be erased upon power-on, the disablement of the hit determination is released,
the game control means is provided with a specific output process for outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than a specific number smaller than the reference number,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a specific measurement number presentation that shows numbers related to the specific measurement number.